Quarterlytics / Consumer Cyclical / Auto - Dealerships / Paragon Banking Group

Paragon Banking Group

pag · LSE Consumer Cyclical
Claim this profile
Ticker pag
Exchange LSE
Sector Consumer Cyclical
Industry Auto - Dealerships
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2012 Annual Report · Paragon Banking Group
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
 Annual Report & Accounts 2012
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Contents

3 

4 

7 

Financial highlights

Chairman’s statement

Chief Executive’s review

12 

Board of Directors

14 

Directors’ report

18 

Corporate social responsibility

23 

Report of the Board to the shareholders on directors’ remuneration 

37 

Statement of directors’ responsibilities

38 

Independent auditors’ report

40 

Corporate governance

45 

Principal risks and uncertainties

47 

Contacts

50 

Consolidated income statement

51 

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

52 

Consolidated balance sheet

53 

Company balance sheet

54 

Consolidated cash fl ow statement

54 

Company cash fl ow statement

55 

Statement of movements in equity

56 

Notes to the accounts

119 

Appendices to the annual report

Contents

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Financial highlights

 £95.5m pre-tax profi t

up 18.2% from £80.8 in 2011

 £184.3m in buy-to-let advances

up from £127.0 in 2011

 £803.5m shareholders’ funds

up from £742.0 in 2011

Earnings per share 24.2p

Total dividend 6.0p

Underlying profi t before taxation 

Profi t before taxation 

Profi t after taxation 

Total loan assets 

Shareholders’ funds 

Net asset value per share 

Earnings per share  

- basic 

- diluted 

Dividend per ordinary share 

2012 
£m 

94.2 
95.5 
72.2 
8,694.6 
803.5 

2012 

269p 

24.2p 
23.5p 
6.0p 

2011 

£m 

81.1 

80.8 

59.6 

8,724.2 

742.0 

2011 

250p 

20.2p 

19.6p 

4.0p 

2010   

£m 

66.1 

71.8 

53.9 

8,911.2 

692.0 

2010   

234p 

18.3p 

17.8p 

3.6p 

2009 

£m 

45.3 

54.3 

41.1 

9,314.3 

650.5 

2009 

220p 

13.9p 

13.7p 

3.3p 

2008

£m

66.9

53.7

37.1

10,053.2

621.2

2008

209p

17.9p

17.9p

3.0p

The derivation of underlying profi t before taxation is described in Appendix B.

Financial highlights   3

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Chairman’s statement

During the year ended 30 September 2012 the Group has pursued its strategic 

objectives  successfully  and  achieved  strong  growth,  resulting  in  the  highest 

profi ts  in  our  history.    We  have  invested  signifi cantly  in  portfolio  acquisitions, 

increased buy-to-let lending, entered into new servicing contracts and completed 

our fi rst securitisation since 2007, with a further securitisation, on materially better 

terms,  being  completed  after  the  year-end.  In  addition,  to  facilitate  the  future 

development  of  our  buy-to-let  franchise,  new  and  enlarged  funding  lines  have 

been agreed with our bankers. The buy-to-let warehouse facility from Macquarie 

Bank has been increased and extended by a further two years and an additional 

warehouse  facility  agreement  has  been  signed  with  Lloyds  Bank,  more  than 

doubling  the  Group’s  warehouse  capacity  to  £450.0  million.  The  Group  is  well 

placed for future growth.

During  the  year  ended  30  September  2012  the  Group’s  profi t  before  taxation 

increased  by  18.2%  to  £95.5  million  (2011:  £80.8  million).  Underlying  profi t, 

before exceptional and fair value items, increased by 16.2% to £94.2 million for 

the year (2011: £81.1 million).

Earnings per share were 24.2p (2011: 20.2p), the increase of 19.8% from last year refl ecting the improved profi ts earned by the Group and a 

reduction in the tax rate. The increase in profi t has also improved the Group’s return on equity to 9.3% from 8.3% for the previous year (note 5). 

The Group’s strategic focus has remained unchanged; to generate growth through our buy-to-let origination franchise, through investment 

in loan portfolios, and by exploiting new opportunities; and to maintain close management of the existing loan portfolio, which continued to 

perform well in the year.

Idem Capital, our dedicated investment subsidiary, has successfully built on the fi ve portfolios purchased in prior years with further investments 

during  the  fi nancial  year  totalling  £115.4  million.  Paragon  Mortgages  and  Mortgage  Trust,  our  buy-to-let  origination  brands,  now  fully 

re-established following the recommencement of new lending in 2010, advanced new loans of £184.3 million (2011: £127.0 million) and a 

strong pipeline of business was in place at the end of the year, which, combined with the 125% increase in warehouse capacity, augurs well 

for lending volumes in the new fi nancial year. 

In  view  of  the  results  achieved  and  the  Board’s  confi dence  in  the  prospects  for  the  business,  the  Company’s  dividend  policy  has  been 

amended. In line with the new policy, outlined under Capital Management below, the Board has proposed a fi nal dividend of 4.50p per share 
(2011: 2.65p) which, when added to the interim dividend of 1.50p, gives a total dividend of 6.00p per share for the year (2011: 4.00p), an 

increase of 50.0%. Subject to approval at the Annual General Meeting on 7 February 2013, the dividend will be paid on 11 February 2013, by 

reference to a record date of 11 January 2013.

 CAPITAL MANAGEMENT

The  Group  has  continued  to  enjoy  strong  cash  generation  during  the  year.  Free  cash  balances  were  £127.7  million  at  the  year-end                          

(30 September 2011: £195.0 million) after investments to support new buy-to-let originations and signifi cant acquisitions by Idem Capital. 

The Company sees opportunities going forward to deploy capital for new lending activities, which should continue to increase, and to invest 

further amounts in loan portfolios through Idem Capital as banks and other fi nancial institutions continue to de-leverage. These cash balances, 

together with future operational cashfl ow, will support the Group’s growth through investment in these areas as well as providing returns to 

shareholders through dividends.

The Group’s current progressive dividend policy has applied since 2008, the dividend increasing from 3.0p per share in respect of the year 

ended 30 September 2008 to 4.0p per share in respect of the year ended 30 September 2011. Since that policy was established, the Group 

has re-commenced its buy-to-let mortgage business, demonstrated that it can access warehouse funding and the securitised funding markets 

and established a strong asset purchase franchise which has contributed substantially to Group profi t growth. 

4   Chairman’s statement

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

The Board keeps under review the appropriate level of capital for the business to meet its operational requirements and strategic development 

objectives and has determined that in view of the strong position of the Group and its confi dence in the prospects for the business, a higher 

level of dividend payment is now appropriate. 

Consequently, the Board proposes, subject to approval at the Annual General Meeting on 7 February 2013, a fi nal dividend of 4.5p per share 

which, when added to the interim dividend of 1.5p, gives a dividend of 6.0p per share for the year, an increase of 50.0% from 2011. The Board 

intends to pursue a progressive dividend policy so that, by 2016 and thereafter, dividend cover will be maintained in the range 3.0 to 3.5 times.

In accordance with our usual practice, we will be proposing at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting a special resolution seeking authority 

from shareholders for the Company to purchase up to 30.1 million of its own shares (10% of the issued share capital). It is customary for 

companies to seek such authority but we would not expect to utilise the authority unless, in the light of market conditions prevailing at the time, 

we consider that to do so would enhance earnings per share and would be in the best interests of shareholders generally. Given the operational 

and strategic opportunities described above and the enhanced dividend policy, the Board has no current intention of using this authority.

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

The Board of Directors is committed to the principles of corporate governance contained in the UK Corporate Governance Code (‘Code’) 

issued by the Financial Reporting Council in May 2010. A detailed explanation of how those principles are applied is given in the Corporate 

Governance section on pages 40 to 44 of this annual report. The Board has considered the new Code, which applies to the Group for the year 

ending 30 September 2013 and considers that it is well placed to comply with its provisions.

 BOARD OF DIRECTORS

On 9 February 2012 Richard Woodman was appointed to the Board as Director of Corporate Development. He was also appointed Managing 

Director of Idem Capital Limited. Mr Woodman joined the Group in 1989 and he has held various senior strategic and fi nancial roles, latterly 

as Director of Business Analysis and Planning. More recently he has taken a lead role in the Group’s strategic development and, in particular, 

in the portfolio acquisition programme through Idem Capital. 

The  excellent  progress  we  have  made 
during  the  year  would  not  have  been 
achieved  without  the  hard  work  and 
dedication  of  our  staff  and  my  fellow 
directors. I thank them all for their efforts.

On  12  September  2012  Fiona  Clutterbuck  was  appointed  as 

a  non-executive  director.  She  is  currently  the  Head  of  Strategy 

and  Corporate  Development  at  the  Phoenix  Group  and  is  also  a 

non-executive  director  of  WS  Atkins  plc.  Ms  Clutterbuck  brings 

to  the  Board  a  substantial  level  of  corporate  fi nance  experience, 

having previously held the positions of Managing Director and Head 

of  Financial  Institutions  Advisory  at  ABN  AMRO  Investment  Bank, 

Managing  Director  and  Global  Co-Head  of  Financial  Institutions 

Group at HSBC Investment Bank and Director at Hill Samuel Bank 

Limited.

On 31 March 2012 Terry Eccles resigned from the Board of Directors owing to health reasons. Mr Eccles was appointed to the Board in 

February  2007  and  served  as  Chairman  of  the  Remuneration  Committee  until  February  2009  and  as  Senior  Independent  Director  from 

February 2009 until July 2011. His experience and wisdom have been invaluable and his presence on the Board will be sadly missed. The 

Board wishes to thank Mr Eccles for his enormous contribution over the past fi ve years and wish him well for the future.

On 31 October 2011 Christopher Newell resigned from the Board of Directors after ten years of service and having been Chairman of the Audit 

and Compliance Committee from March 2003 until July 2011. The Board would like to record its gratitude for his considerable support over 

the years and for his able and professional chairmanship of the Audit and Compliance Committee.

Chairman’s statement   5

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

The Company sees opportunities going forward to deploy capital for new lending activities, which 
should continue to increase, and to invest further amounts in loan portfolios through Idem Capital 
as banks and other fi nancial institutions continue to de-leverage.

STAFF

The excellent progress we have made during the year would not have been achieved without the hard work and dedication of our staff and my 

fellow directors. I thank them all for their efforts.

 CONCLUSION

The year ended 30 September 2012 has been a very successful period for the Group. The buy-to-let and portfolio purchase businesses have 

grown strongly and contributed to record profi ts for the Group for the year.  The developments in funding capacity during the year, and in the 

period immediately after, with the completion of two public securitisation transactions and a more than doubling of our buy-to-let warehouse 

facilities, leave the Group well funded to support the further development of the buy-to-let business. Alongside this, the strong operational 

cashfl ows  generated  in  the  year  put  the  Group  in  a  good  position  to  continue  to  benefi t  from  future  portfolio  acquisitions  and  servicing 

opportunities arising out of the de-leveraging of banks and other fi nancial institutions.

The strong trading position of the Group and the Board’s confi dence as to the future prospects of the business have led to a substantial 

increase in this year’s proposed dividend and the adoption of a new policy aimed at moving the Group’s dividend towards 3.0 to 3.5 times 

coverage over the medium term. The Group enters the new fi nancial year with confi dence.

ROBERT G DENCH

Chairman

20 November 2012

6   Chairman’s statement

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Chief Executive’s review

During the year ended 30 September 2012 the Group has successfully pursued 

its strategy to deliver shareholder value through purchasing portfolios, developing 

new lending, entering into new servicing agreements and continuing the careful 

management of the extant portfolios. 

FINANCIAL REVIEW

CONSOLIDATED RESULTS
For the year ended 30 September 2012

Interest receivable 

Interest payable and similar charges  

Net interest income 
Other operating income 

Total operating income 
Operating expenses 

Provisions for losses 

Underlying profi t 
Fair value net gains / (losses) 

Operating profi t being profi t on ordinary activities before taxation 
Tax charge on profi t on ordinary activities 

Profi t on ordinary activities after taxation 

Dividend – rate per share for the year 

Basic earnings per share 

Diluted earnings per share 

2012 
£m 

293.8 
(136.0) 

157.8 
12.4 

170.2 
(51.9) 
(24.1) 

94.2 
1.3 

95.5 
(23.3) 

72.2 

6.0p 
24.2p 
23.5p 

2011

£m

258.0

(122.2)

135.8

15.1

150.9

(45.4)

(24.4)

81.1

(0.3)

80.8

(21.2)

59.6

4.0p

20.2p

19.6p

The Group is organised into two major operating divisions: First Mortgages, which includes the buy-to-let and owner-occupied fi rst mortgage 

assets and other sources of income derived from fi rst charge mortgages; and Consumer Finance, which includes secured lending, car, retail 

fi nance and unsecured loan books and other sources of income derived from consumer loans. Both divisions include internally originated and 

acquired assets. These divisions are the basis on which the Group reports primary segmental information.

Chief Executive’s review   7

 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

The underlying operating profi ts of these business segments are detailed fully in appendix B to the annual report and are summarised below.

Underlying operating profi t  
First Mortgages 

Consumer Finance 

2012 
£m 

61.6 
32.6 

94.2 

2011

£m

67.3

13.8

81.1

Net interest income increased by 16.2% to £157.8 million (2011: £135.8 million), refl ecting the impact of new loan assets, both acquired and 

originated, on interest income and margins, partially offset by a 0.3% reduction in the size of the loan book during the year. 

Other operating income was £12.4 million for the year, compared with £15.1 million in 2011, the reduction refl ecting, principally, a lower level 

of third party fee income as a result of the purchase of accounts previously administered by the Group, early in the year.

Operating expenses during the year were 14.3% higher at £51.9 million (2011: £45.4 million). The increase is primarily due to employment 

costs, following the recruitment of additional staff, during the year and in the second half of 2011, to administer purchased and third party 

loan portfolios. The cost:income ratio was in line with our expectations at 30.5% for the year (appendix A), a similar level to last year, and 

remains signifi cantly below the industry average. The Board remains focused on controlling operating costs through the application of rigorous 

budgeting, management reporting and monitoring procedures.

The charge for impairment provisions of £24.1 million was 1.2% lower than the charge of £24.4 million for 2011, an increase in the charge 

within the First Mortgages division, to more normal levels from a low level of charge in 2011, being more than offset by a reduction in the 

impairment charge within the Consumer Finance division. As a percentage of loans to customers (note 31) the charge has remained at 0.28%, 

the fi gure recorded in 2011. Low interest rates have increased affordability for customers, reducing the incidence of new arrears and assisting 

the correction of past arrears. The loan books continue to be carefully managed and credit performance remains in line with our expectations. 

Yield curve movements during the year resulted in hedging instrument fair value net gains of £1.3m (2011: losses of £0.3 million), which do not 

affect cash fl ow. As the fair value movements of hedged assets or liabilities are expected to trend to zero over time, this item is merely a timing 

difference. The Group remains economically and appropriately hedged. 

Cash  generation  has  remained  strong  over  the  period.  Free  cash  balances  stood  at  £127.7  million  at  30  September  2012  (2011:                         

£195.0 million), after investing signifi cantly in both asset purchases and in the development of our buy-to-let lending business, detailed below.

Corporation  tax  has  been  charged  at  an  effective  tax  rate  of  24.4%,  compared  to  26.2%  in  2011,  the  decrease  being  attributable  to  the 

reduction in the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK.  

Profi ts after taxation of £72.2 million (2011: £59.6 million) have been transferred to shareholders’ funds, which totalled £803.5 million at the 

year-end (2011: £742.0 million), representing 269p per share (2011: 250p per share) (appendix C).

BUSINESS REVIEW

OPERATING SEGMENTS

First Mortgages

Buy-to-let  loans  advanced  under  the  Group’s  new  lending  products  were  £184.3  million  for  the  year  (2011:  £127.0  million)  and  a  further        

£4.6  million  (2011:  £5.8  million)  of  loans  were  made  to  existing  borrowers  in  respect  of  further  advances.  This  brings  the  total  value  of 

completions under the Group’s new products since the recommencement of new lending in October 2010 to £311.3 million. Application levels 

continued to increase over the year, with the pipeline of applications and offers outstanding totalling £129.9 million at 30 September 2012 

(2011: £67.5 million). The credit quality of the new lending business written in the year has been excellent, with an average loan to value ratio 

of 70.1% (2011: 69.2%) and no arrears on loans advanced since the recommencement of lending in October 2010.

8   Chief Executive’s review

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

The Group has continued to focus mainly on the higher margin professional landlord business under the Paragon Mortgages brand. Paragon’s 

professional landlord business is widely sourced from a large number of mortgage and commercial fi nance introducers, giving us the capacity 

to support materially higher business volumes in due course.

At  30  September  2012,  the  buy-to-let  portfolio  was  £8,196.4  million,  compared  with  £8,231.7  million  a  year  earlier.  The  redemption  rate 

on the back book remained low at 2.2% for the year (2011: 2.2%) with landlords continuing to display a long-term commitment to property 

investment, whilst alternative offerings from other lenders remain unattractive as a result of generally higher funding and capital costs.  

The  credit  performance  of  the  portfolio  over  the  year  has  again  been  exemplary,  with  the  percentage  of  loans  three  months  or  more  in        

arrears (including acquired loans and receivership cases but excluding possession and receivership cases held for sale) standing at 0.48% 

at  30  September  2012  (30  September  2011:  0.63%)  and  remains  considerably  better  than  the  comparable  market  average  of  1.51%  as 

recorded by the Council of Mortgage Lenders (‘CML’) at that date (30 September 2011: 1.90%). Despite an improved arrears performance 

over the year, the impairment charge attributable to First Mortgages increased to £12.4 million for the year from £5.6 million for 2011 a return 

to normal levels of provisioning after a low level of charge last year and following an increase in receiver of rent activity, where a charge for 

impairments may be made for accounts that are less than three months in arrears. At 30 September 2012 there were 1,504 properties across 

all portfolios where a receiver had been appointed (30 September 2011: 1,483). Of those available for letting, 94.2% were let (30 September 

2011: 93.9%). 

The latest Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors (‘RICS’) UK Residential Lettings Survey again confi rms that tenant demand has continued 

to grow whilst landlord supply of property new to the lettings market has stabilised. As a consequence of the high level of demand, the RICS 

survey indicates that rents are expected to continue to increase. The latest survey data from the Association of Residential Letting Agents 

confi rms a similar picture with agents on balance noting an increase in achievable rents over the six months to June 2012. Whilst volumes 

remain low by historical standards, buy-to-let remains the only growth sector of the mortgage market, with the CML reporting that the value of 

buy-to-let advances increased by 25.6% to £15.7 billion in the course of the fi nancial year (2011: £12.5 billion) whilst credit quality in the sector 

continues to improve with industry-wide buy-to-let arrears once again lower than in the owner-occupied market (note 6).

The owner-occupied book reduced to £99.2 million from £128.7 million during the year ended 30 September 2012 and performed in line with 

the Group’s expectations. Save for the management of this book in run-off, there has been little activity in recent years in this area as the Group 

has focused on other lending markets, portfolio acquisitions and other sources of revenue generation.

Consumer Finance

At 30 September 2012, the total loans outstanding on the Consumer Finance books were £399.0 million, compared with £363.8 million at 

30 September 2011, this increase being due to portfolio purchases (covered fully below) and the continuing low level of redemptions across 

the  portfolios.  The  performance  of  the  Consumer  Finance  book,  including  the  acquired  assets,  remains  satisfactory  and  in  line  with  our 

expectations.

The  Group’s  secured  loan  portfolio  at  30  September  2012,  including  the  acquired  assets,  was  £279.9  million  (2011:  £340.1  million).  The 

unsecured  loan,  retail  fi nance  and  car  fi nance  portfolios,  including  the  acquired  assets,  totalled  £119.1  million  at  30  September  2012                 

(30 September 2011: £23.7 million).

PORTFOLIO OPPORTUNITIES

A major area of strategic focus has been the acquisition of loan portfolios through Idem Capital and the servicing of third party loan portfolios 

as opportunities are created through the ongoing process de-leveraging by the larger banks and other fi nancial institutions, which we expect 

to  continue  for  the  foreseeable  future.  Idem  Capital  has  fi rmly  established  itself  as  one  of  the  top  consumer  debt  buyers  in  the  UK,  with 

total investments in the fi nancial year of £115.4 million (2011: £22.7 million). In addition to assets acquired in its own right, Idem, through its 

sister companies, Moorgate Loan Servicing and Arden Credit Management, has established four new servicing contracts with co-investment 

partners during the year. These add volume to the Group’s servicing operations and enhance earnings, with little or no capital investment. 

Progress has been excellent and has resulted in an increase in operating profi ts from these transactions to £26.3 million (2011: £7.6 million) 

during the fi nancial year. 

Chief Executive’s review   9

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Idem Capital

Idem Capital invests in loan portfolios either as principal, where Idem acquires pools in its own right, or as co-investor alongside other partners 

with, typically, Moorgate Loan Servicing appointed to act as servicer. Co-investing has the potential for higher returns where the Group also 

derives income from servicing the loans within the underlying portfolio. Investments are made only after signifi cant due diligence work on the 

portfolio and sensitivity testing of potential returns. 

In October 2011 Idem Capital completed the purchase of a portfolio of unsecured consumer loans, previously serviced by the Group, from The 

Royal Bank of Scotland plc (‘RBS’) for £43.2 million. In addition, under the terms of a forward fl ow agreement with RBS, a total of £0.6 million 

of unsecured consumer loans were acquired in the year, and further opportunities are anticipated. 

Another signifi cant portfolio purchase was completed in December 2011 when Idem Capital acquired a portfolio of closed UK credit card 

receivables from MBNA Europe Bank Limited, for £55.7 million. The management of these accounts was transferred to the Group during the 

second quarter of the year. 

The  acquisition  of  a  further  portfolio  of  closed  UK  credit  card  receivables  from  MBNA  Europe  Bank  Limited  was  announced  on                                              

3 September 2012. The consideration payable on completion was £16.1 million and the management of these accounts was transferred to 

the Group before the year end.

By 30 September 2012, total investment in portfolios by Idem Capital since 2009 had reached £161.9 million. A number of potential portfolio 

investments are currently under review and the Group’s track record in loan servicing, risk management and portfolio investment positions it 

well to exploit similar opportunities as they arise in future.

Moorgate Loan Servicing

The Group’s third party loan servicing business operates through Moorgate Loan Servicing and its division, Arden Credit Management, utilising 

our core administration and collections skills. Our experience in loan management established over many years has enabled us to extend this 

service to our third party clients, providing signifi cant added value to the performance of their loan portfolios. 

During the year Moorgate Loan Servicing has assumed the servicing of four further portfolios, comprising 149,000 accounts, on behalf of 

third parties (2011: 50,000 accounts) with the result that 49.9% of accounts under management by the Group at 30 September 2012 were 

managed on behalf of third parties (2011: 58.6%). 

Moorgate is well placed to take advantage of other opportunities that may arise over the coming years, particularly as portfolio disposals take 

place as part of the wider fi nancial sector de-leveraging process.

REGULATION

Regulation is undergoing material change across the fi nancial services sector. Some aspects will affect the current operations of the Group, 

although the impact is unlikely to be signifi cant. 

The Financial Services Authority (‘FSA’) has concluded, through its Mortgage Market Review, that there will be enhanced prudential supervision 

of non-deposit takers engaged in regulated lending. Regulation of second charge mortgages will transfer from the Offi ce of Fair Trading to 

the FSA’s successor bodies in 2014. Separately, it is proposed that those successor bodies will, in due course, assume responsibility for the 

regulation of consumer credit. Certain areas of the Group’s operations are already authorised by the FSA in respect of residential mortgage and 

insurance activity and we expect to be well placed to comply with the proposed changes in the regulatory framework.

The European Commission’s proposed directive on credit agreements relating to residential property, which may impose additional disclosure 

and other requirements for all mortgage lending to consumers secured on residential property, has yet to be concluded. It remains unclear to 

what extent these obligations will apply to buy-to-let lending.

We will continue to maintain an active dialogue with the UK and European regulatory authorities as these proposals develop.

10   Chief Executive’s review

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

FUNDING

On 10 November 2011 the Group completed a £163.8 million securitisation of buy-to-let loans, through Paragon Mortgages (No. 16) PLC. 

This  securitisation,  the  Group’s  fi rst  since  2007,  released  warehouse  capacity  to  accommodate  further  lending  growth.  Notes  totalling                 

£131.7  million,  rated  Aaa  by  Moody’s  Investors  Service  and  AAA  by  Fitch  Ratings,  were  sold  to  investors  with  the  Group  retaining  the 

remaining, unrated, notes. This was an important landmark for the Group, being the fi rst buy-to-let securitisation by any issuer in the UK since 

the credit crunch. The notes were priced at LIBOR plus 275 basis points, refl ecting the poor bond market conditions at that time. Whilst the 

notes match-fund the collateralised loans to maturity, we have the ability to call the notes after three years.

After the year end, on 25 October 2012, the Group completed a £200.0 million securitisation of buy-to-let loans, through Paragon Mortgages 

(No. 17) PLC (‘PM 17’). PM 17 comprises £175.0 million of AAA rated notes, £10.5 million of AA rated notes and £10.0 million of A rated 

notes at margins of 135, 190 and 290 basis points over three month LIBOR respectively. £4.5 million of subordinated notes were retained by 

the Group, which also invested £6.0 million in the fi rst loss fund, bringing the Group’s total investment in PM 17 to £10.5 million, or 5.25% of 

the issue amount.

The pricing of the PM 17 transaction refl ected the strong credit profi le of the Group’s buy-to-let assets and our experience as an issuer of high 

quality bonds in the mortgage backed securities market. This was only the second securitisation of buy-to-let loans since the credit crunch, 

the fi rst to issue junior, single A rated, bonds since 2008 and was the Group’s 55th securitisation since pioneering the methodology in 1987.

The Group funded its mortgage originations during the year through a £200.0 million revolving warehouse provided by Macquarie Bank.  This 

facility was renewed and extended for a further two years after the year end and the amount available for drawing increased to £250.0 million. 

On 27 September 2012, the Group signed an additional £200.0 million revolving warehouse facility provided by the wholesale division of Lloyds 

Bank. The facility, rated by Fitch Ratings, will be available to Paragon Fifth Funding Limited, an orphan special purpose vehicle company, and 

interest will be charged on the amount drawn at three month LIBOR plus 275 basis points. The facility is structured with a three-year term to 

permit drawings and re-drawings in its fi rst eighteen months, or up to 24 months, subject to a capital markets refi nancing of part of the facility 

in the fi rst twelve months.

The Group uses the warehouse facilities to originate mortgage loans prior to arranging term funding in the securitisation markets and, following 

the  successful  completion  of  the  issuances  by  Paragon  Mortgages  (No.16)  and  Paragon  Mortgages  (No.  17),  we  plan  to  return  to  the 

securitisation markets regularly as business volumes increase. Dependant on volume and market conditions, additional warehousing capacity 

may be sought in due course.

CONCLUSION

The buy-to-let and portfolio purchase businesses have grown strongly and contributed to record profi ts. The developments in funding capacity 

in the last 15 months leave the Group well funded to support the further development of the buy-to-let business, while the strong operational 

cashfl ows generated put the Group in a good position to continue to benefi t from future portfolio acquisitions and servicing opportunities 

arising out of bank de-leveraging.

NIGEL S TERRINGTON

Chief Executive

20 November 2012

Chief Executive’s review   11

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Board of directors

Robert G Dench Chairman
Age 62

Bob Dench joined the Group as a  non-executive  director  in  September  2004  and  was  appointed 
Chairman in February 2007. During an extended career with Barclays he held a number of senior 
positions in the UK and overseas, leaving in 2004. He is also a non-executive director of AXA UK 
plc and Chairman of AXA Ireland Limited.

Nigel S Terrington Chief Executive
Age 52

Nigel  Terrington  joined  the  Group  in  1987  and  became  Chief  Executive  in  June  1995,  having 
held  the  positions  of  Treasurer  and  Finance  Director.  Prior  to  Paragon,  he  worked  in  investment 
banking.  He  is  Deputy  Chairman  of  the  Council  of  Mortgage  Lenders  and  is  also  a  member  of 
HM  Treasury’s  Home  Finance  Forum.  He  has  previously  held  the  positions  of  Chairman  of  the 
Intermediary  Mortgage  Lenders  Association,  Chairman  of  the  Finance  and  Leasing  Association 
(‘FLA’)  Consumer  Finance  Division  and  a  Board  member  of  the  FLA.  He  is  an  associate  of  the 
Chartered Institute of Bankers. 

Nicholas Keen Finance Director
Age 54

Nick  Keen  joined  the  Group  in  May  1991  and  became  Finance  Director  in  June  1995  having 
previously held the position of Treasurer. Prior to joining the Group he worked in Corporate Banking, 
Treasury and Capital Markets. He is Chairman of the Paragon Credit Committee. 

John A Heron Director of New Business
Age 53

John Heron joined the Group in January 1986. Mr Heron joined the Board in 2003 and is responsible 
for the development of all the Group’s new business operations. He is a Fellow of the Chartered 
Institute  of  Bankers  and  Chair  of  the  CML  buy-to-let  panel.  He  is  a  Board  member  of  the 
Intermediary Mortgage Lenders Association, having previously held the position of Chair. John was 
also previously Deputy Chairman of the CML.

Richard J Woodman Director of Corporate Development
Age 47

Richard Woodman was appointed to the Board as Director of Corporate Development in February 
2012.  He  was  also  appointed  Managing  Director  of  Idem  Capital  Limited.  He  joined  the  Group 
in 1989 and has held various senior strategic and fi nancial roles, latterly as Director of Business 
Analysis and Planning. More recently he has taken a lead role in the Group’s strategic development 
and, in particular, in the portfolio acquisition programme through Idem Capital. He is a member of 
the Chartered Institute of Management Accountants.

12   Board of Directors

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Edward A Tilly Non-executive director
Age 69

Ted Tilly was appointed as a non-executive director in April 2008. Mr Tilly was the senior independent 
director of Retail Decisions PLC from January 2000 until January 2007. He has held a number of 
directorships  including  Chairman  of  Barclays  Life  Assurance  Company  Ltd  from  1999  to  2003. 
Prior to this he was Chairman and Chief Executive of GE Capital’s European insurance division. He 
was with the Legal & General Group for nearly 30 years where he held a number of senior positions 
including Director Life and Pensions and Director International. He is Paragon’s Senior Independent 
Director.

Alan K Fletcher Non-executive director
Age 62

Alan  Fletcher  was  appointed  as  a  non-executive  director  in  February  2009.  Mr  Fletcher  has 
considerable experience in fi nancial services, including pension fund trusteeship and investment 
fund management. He was Chairman of Neville James Holdings prior to its acquisition by Challenger 
International of Australia, following which he was Sales and Marketing Director of Challenger Group 
Services  and  a  director  of  Challenger  Life  (UK)  from  2002  to  2003.  He  has  been  non-executive 
Chairman of Hyperama plc since 2000 and was Chairman of the professional training company, 
Fresh Professional Development, from 2003 to 2010. He was a member of the General Synod of 
the Church of England between 2007 and 2010. He has been a member of the Church of England 
Pensions  Board  since  2009  and  is  also  a  member  of  its  Investment  Committee  and  has  been 
appointed  Chairman  of  the  Housing  Committee  from  1  January  2013.  He  is  Chairman  of  the 
Paragon Remuneration Committee.

Peter J N Hartill Non-executive director
Age 63

Peter  Hartill  was  appointed  as  a  non-executive  director  in  February  2011.  He  is  a  Chartered 
Accountant, is currently non-executive Chairman of Deeley Group and a non-executive director of 
Scott Bader Limited. Previously, he spent 40 years with Deloitte, becoming a senior audit partner 
and  a  business  advisor  with  experience  across  a  wide  range  of  industries  and  business  issues. 
Specifi cally  he  has  considerable  experience  in  acquisitions  and  disposals,  capital  raising,  risk 
control and corporate governance in the fi nancial services sector. He is Chairman of the Paragon 
Audit and Compliance Committee.

Fiona Clutterbuck Non-executive director
Age 54

Fiona Clutterbuck was appointed as a non-executive director in September 2012. She is currently 
the Head of Strategy and Corporate Development at the Phoenix Group and is also a non-executive 
director of WS Atkins plc and brings to the Board a substantial level of corporate fi nance experience, 
having  previously  held  the  positions  of  Managing  Director  and  Head  of  Financial  Institutions 
Advisory  at  ABN  AMRO  Investment  Bank,  Managing  Director  and  Global  Co-Head  of  Financial 
Institutions Group at HSBC Investment Bank and Director at Hill Samuel Bank Limited.

Board of Directors   13

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Directors’ report

The  directors  submit  their  Report  and  the  Accounts  for  the  year  ended  30  September  2012  which  were  approved  by  the  Board  on                           

20 November 2012. 

Principal activities

The  Company  (registered  number  2336032)  is  a  holding  company  co-ordinating  the  activities  of  its  subsidiary  companies.  The  principal 

activities of the Group continue to be the operation of its fi rst mortgage and consumer fi nance businesses.

Results and dividends

The results for the year are shown in the Consolidated Income Statement on page 50. The directors recommend a fi nal dividend of 4.50p 

per share (2011: 2.65p per share) which, taken with the interim dividend of 1.50p per share (2011: 1.35p per share) paid on 27 July 2012, 

would  give  a  total  dividend  for  the  year  of  6.00p  per  share  (2011:  4.00p  per  share).  Before  dividends,  retained  profi ts  of  £72.2  million                       

(2011: £59.6 million) have been transferred to reserves.

Business review

The Companies Act 2006 requires the Company to set out in this report a fair review of the business of the Group during the year ended          

30 September 2012, including an analysis of the position of the Group at the year end and a description of the principal risks and uncertainties 

facing the Group (known as a ‘Business Review’).

The information that fulfi ls the Business Review requirements can be found in the following sections of the Annual Report. All of the information 

presented in these sections is incorporated by reference into this Directors’ Report and is deemed to form part of this report.

•  The sections of the Chairman’s Statement headed ‘Capital Management’ and ‘Conclusion’ on pages 4 to 6

•  The Chief Executive’s Review on pages 7 to 11

•  The Corporate Social Responsibility Report on pages 18 to 22

•  The Corporate Governance Statement on pages 40 to 44

•  The principal risks and uncertainties to which the Group is exposed on pages 45 and 46

Events occurring after the balance sheet date are described in note 48, and discussed in the Chief Executive’s Review.

Pages 14 to 17 inclusive, together with the sections of the Annual Report incorporated by reference, comprise a directors’ report for the Group 

which has been drawn up and presented in accordance with, and in reliance upon, applicable English company law and the liabilities of the 

directors in connection with this report shall be subject to the limitations and restrictions provided by such law.

14   Directors’ report

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Directors

The interests of the directors at the year end in the share capital of the Company, all benefi cially held, are shown below.

R G Dench 

N S Terrington  

N Keen  

J A Heron   

R J Woodman  

E A Tilly*     

A K Fletcher*   

P J N Hartill*    

F Clutterbuck*  

*  Non-executive directors.

At 30 September 2012 

At 30 September 2011 

Ordinary shares 

or on appointment

Ordinary shares

117,000 
647,972 
368,679 
252,680 
89,691 
30,000 
125,000 
7,000 
- 

117,000

647,972

368,679

252,680

89,691

30,000

125,000

7,000

-

In addition, certain directors had interests in the share capital of the Company by virtue of options granted under the Company’s executive 

share option schemes and awards under the Paragon Performance Share Plan, the Deferred Bonus Scheme and the Matching Share Plan, 

details of which are given in the Report of the Board to the Shareholders on Directors’ Remuneration on pages 23 to 36.

There have been no changes in the directors’ interests in the share capital of the Company since 30 September 2012.

The directors have no interests in the shares or debentures of the Company’s subsidiary companies.

Mr  R  J  Woodman  and  Ms  F  Clutterbuck  were  appointed  to  the  Board  on  9  February  2012  and  12  September  2012  respectively  and                 

Mr C D Newell and Mr T Eccles resigned from the Board on 31 October 2011 and 31 March 2012 respectively.

The appointment and replacement of the Company’s directors is governed by its Articles of Association, the UK Corporate Governance Code, 

the Companies Acts and related legislation and the individual service contracts and terms of appointment of the directors. The powers of 

the directors, and their service contracts and terms of appointment, are described in the Corporate Governance section on pages 40 to 44. 

In accordance with the Articles of Association Mr R J Woodman and Ms F Clutterbuck will retire from the Board at the end of the forthcoming 
Annual General Meeting, and, being eligible, will offer themselves for re-election. 

The UK Corporate Governance Code recommends that all directors should be subject to re-appointment annually and therefore all of the 

other directors, Mr R G Dench, Mr N S Terrington, Mr N Keen, Mr J A Heron, Mr E A Tilly, Mr A K Fletcher and Mr P J N Hartill, have agreed to 

voluntarily retire from the Board at the end of the forthcoming Annual General Meeting, and, being eligible, will offer themselves for re-election.

None of the directors has a service contract with the Company requiring more than 12 months’ notice of termination to be given. 

From 1 October 2008, a director has had a statutory duty to avoid a situation in which he or she has, or can have, an interest that confl icts or 

possibly may confl ict with the interests of the Company. A director will not be in breach of that duty if the relevant matter has been authorised 

in accordance with the Articles of Association by the other directors. The Articles of Association include the relevant authorisation for directors 

to approve such confl icts.

None of the directors had, either during or at the end of the year, any material interest in any contract of signifi cance with the Company or its 

subsidiaries.

Directors’ report   15

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Capital structure

Details of the issued share capital of the Company, together with details of movements in its issued share capital in the year, are given in note 

38 to the accounts. The Company has one class of ordinary share which carries no right to fi xed income. Each ordinary share carries the 

right to one vote at general meetings of the Company. The rights and obligations attaching to ordinary shares are set out in the Articles of 

Association of the Company.

There are no specifi c restrictions on the size of a member’s holding or on the transfer of shares. Both of these matters are governed by the 

general provisions of the Company’s Articles of Association and prevailing legislation. The Articles of Association may be amended by special 

resolution of the shareholders. The directors are not aware of any agreements between holders of the Company’s shares in respect of voting 

rights or which might result in restrictions on the transfer of securities.

Details of employee share schemes are set out in note 15 to the accounts. Votes attaching to shares held by employee benefi t trusts are not 

exercised at general meetings of the Company.

The Company presently has the authority to issue ordinary shares up to a value of £99,600,000 and to make market purchases of up to 

29,900,000 £1 ordinary shares, granted at the Annual General Meeting on 9 February 2012. These authorities expire at the conclusion of the 

forthcoming Annual General Meeting on 7 February 2013.

Purchase of own shares

At 30 September 2007 the Company had, as part of a £40.0 million repurchase programme, repurchased 6,689,000 10p ordinary shares 

having an aggregate nominal value of £668,900. The reasons for the repurchase programme were set out in an announcement made by 

the Company through RNS on 25 May 2005. On 29 January 2008 these shares were consolidated into 668,900 £1 ordinary shares. All of 

these shares were held as at 30 September 2012 and 30 September 2011 as treasury shares, representing 0.2% of the issued share capital 

excluding treasury shares, and this holding represents the maximum number of its own £1 ordinary shares held by the Company at any time 

during the past year. 

Substantial shareholdings

As at 31 October 2012, being a date not more than one month before the date of the notice convening the forthcoming Annual General 

Meeting,  the  Company  had  been  notifi ed  of  the  following  interests  of  more  than  3%  in  the  nominal  value  of  the  ordinary  share  capital  of            

the Company:

BlackRock  

M & G Investment Management   

Legal & General Investment Management 

Aviva Investors 

Standard Life Investments 

Old Mutual Asset Managers 

Hof Hoorneman Bankiers  

Henderson Global Investors  

Schroder Investment Management   

Ordinary Shares 

% Held

40,067,442 

16,528,835 

12,658,328 

12,505,141 

11,912,455 

11,775,600 

11,316,891 

10,434,087 

9,251,517 

13.30%

5.50%

4.20%

4.15%

3.96%

3.91%

3.76%

3.46%

3.07%

16   Directors’ report

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Donations

Company  law  requires  the  disclosure  of  political  donations  and  expenditure  by  any  Group  company.  During  the  year  ended                                                        

30 September 2012 no such payments were made (2011: £nil). 

Contributions  to  charitable  institutions  in  the  United  Kingdom  amounted  to  £371,000  (2011:  £37,000).  These  include  contributions  of   

£353,000 to charities providing debt advice to customers, based on the amount of customer repayments handled by them in accordance 

with industry practice.

Close company status

So far as the directors are aware, the Company is not a close company for taxation purposes.

Creditor payment policy

The Group agrees terms and conditions with each of its suppliers and ensures that its suppliers are aware of these terms. Payment is then 

made on the terms agreed, subject to the appropriate terms and conditions being met by the supplier. It is not the Group’s policy to follow 

any code or standard on payment practice.

The trade creditor days fi gure has not been stated as the measure is not appropriate to the business.

Auditors

The directors have taken all reasonable steps to make themselves and the Company’s auditors aware of any information needed in preparing 

the audit of the Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year, and, as far as each of the directors is aware, there is no relevant audit 

information of which the auditors are unaware.

A  resolution  for  the  re-appointment  of  Deloitte  LLP  as  the  auditors  of  the  Company  is  to  be  proposed  at  the  forthcoming  Annual                           
General Meeting.

Annual General Meeting

The Annual General Meeting of the Company will take place on 7 February 2013 in London. A notice convening the Annual General Meeting 

is being circulated to shareholders with this Annual Report and Accounts.

Approved by the Board of Directors and signed on behalf of the Board.

JOHN G GEMMELL

Company Secretary

20 November 2012

Directors’ report   17

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Corporate social responsibility

The Group believes that the long-term interests of shareholders, employees and customers are best served by acting in a socially responsible 

manner. As such, the Group ensures that a high standard of corporate governance is maintained. 

Commitment to our customers

The Group places the needs of customers at the heart of its day-to-day operations. With a commitment from the Board, fairness to customers 

is a key consideration and objective at all stages of the lifetime of a loan.

Training and development

The Group has been accredited under the ‘Investors in People’ scheme since 1997. This demonstrates the Group’s commitment to the training 

and development of employees. The appraisal system is designed to assist employees in developing their careers and to identify and provide 

appropriate training opportunities, with all employees receiving a review at least annually. 

The corporate training and development strategy focuses on providing opportunities to develop all employees and is central to the achievement 

of the Group’s business objectives. On average employees received 7.8 days training in the year (2011: 8.2 days).

Equality and diversity

The Group is committed to providing a working environment in which employees feel valued and respected and are able to contribute to the 

success of the business, and to employing a workforce that recognises the diversity of customers. Employees are requested to co-operate 

with the Group’s efforts to ensure the policy is fully implemented. 

The Group’s aim is that its employees should be able to work in an environment free from discrimination, harassment and bullying, and that 

employees, job applicants, customers, retailers, business introducers and suppliers should be treated fairly regardless of:

• 

 race, colour, nationality (including citizenship), ethnic or national origins 

• 

 gender, sexual orientation, marital or family status

• 

 religious or political beliefs or affi liations

• 

 disability, impairment or age

• 

 real or suspected infection with HIV/AIDS

• 

 membership of a trade union

and that they should not be disadvantaged by unjust or unfair conditions or requirements.

18   Corporate social responsibility

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

When  responding  to  changes  in  its  business,  the  Group  seeks  to  minimise  the  requirement  for  compulsory  redundancy,  retraining  and 

redeploying employees wherever possible.

The Group aims to ensure that applications for employment from people with disabilities, and other under-represented groups, are given full 

and fair consideration and that such people are given the same training, development and job opportunities as other employees. Every effort 

is also made to retrain and support employees who suffer from disabilities during their employment, including the provision of fl exible working 

to assist their re-entry into the workplace.

Composition of the workforce is reviewed on an annual basis and employee satisfaction with equality of opportunity is monitored as part of 

the  regular  employee  feedback  surveys.  Human  Resources  policies  are  reviewed  regularly  to  ensure  that  they  are  non-discriminatory  and 

promote equality of opportunity. In particular, recruitment, selection, promotion, training and development policies and practices are monitored 

to ensure that all employees have the opportunity to train and develop according to their abilities.

Information on the composition of the workforce at the year end is summarised below:

Female employees 

Female management grade employees 

Female directors 

Ethnic minority employees 

Ethnic minority management grade employees 

Employees’ involvement

2012 
£m 

58.1% 
44.5% 
11.1% 

11.3% 
4.4% 

2011

£m

58.4%

45.1%

-

9.2%

3.5%

The directors recognise the benefi t of keeping employees informed of the progress of the business. The Group sponsors a Staff Forum, attended 

by elected employee representatives from each area of the business, which exists primarily to facilitate communication and dissemination of 

information throughout the Group and provides a means by which employees can be consulted on matters affecting them. 

Employees are provided with regular information on the performance and plans of the Group, and the fi nancial and economic factors affecting 

it, through information circulars and presentations.

The Company operates a Sharesave share option scheme and a profi t sharing scheme, both of which enable eligible employees to benefi t 

from the performance of the business.

The directors encourage employee involvement at all levels through the appraisal process and communication between directors, managers, 

teams and individual employees. 

Corporate social responsibility   19

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Environmental policy

The Group is engaged in mortgage and consumer fi nance and arrears management and therefore its overall environmental impact is considered 

to be low. The main environmental impacts for the Group are limited to universal environmental issues such as resource use, procurement in 

offi ces and business travel.

The Group complies with all applicable laws and regulations relating to the environment and operates a Green Charter, which:

•  ensures all buildings occupied by the Group are managed effi ciently by its Facilities Team and Building Surveyor

•  encourages employees to conserve energy 

•  provides facilities to enable employees to re-cycle used products

• 

 controls business travel and provides opportunities for employees to travel to work in various ways; i.e. providing cycle racks and showers 

(where possible)

•  displays a Paragon Green Charter at all sites to encourage employees to be environmentally friendly at all times

•  ensures liaison with the local community

• 

 ensures  that  redundant  IT  equipment  is  disposed  of  within  current  directives  /  regulations  (WEEE  -  Waste  Electrical  and  Electronic 

Equipment), recycling 98% of such equipment 

•  ensures that all fl uorescent light tubes are disposed of in a safe manner, compliant with appropriate regulations

•  arranges for paper waste products to be recycled, securely, by third parties

The Green Charter is kept under continuous review by the Facilities team.

The Group’s paper-based stationery is all procured from FSC certifi ed suppliers.

The Group has been involved in no prosecutions, accidents or similar non-compliances in respect of environmental matters. 

20   Corporate social responsibility

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

The  environmental  key  performance  indicators  for  the  Group,  determined  in  accordance  with  the  Reporting  Guidelines  published  by  the 

Department for Environment Food and Rural Affairs (DEFRA) in 2006 are set out below.

Direct inputs (operational)

Greenhouse gases

Defi nition

Gas

Emissions from utility boilers

Vehicle fuel

Petrol and diesel used by staff and company cars

Absolute tonnes C0 2

Normalised tonnes C0 2
per £m income

2012

2011

2012

2011

366

415

321

496

2.1

2.4

2.1

3.3

Waste

Defi nition

Absolute tonnes

Normalised tonnes 

Landfi ll

General  offi ce  waste,  which  includes  a  mixture  of 

134

paper, card, wood, plastics and metal

2012

2011

124

Recycled

General  offi ce  waste  recycled,  primarily  paper  and 

82

175

0.5

cardboard

per £m income

2012

2011

0.8

0.8

1.2

Indirect inputs (supply chain)

Greenhouse gases

Defi nition

Absolute tonnes C0 2

Normalised tonnes C0 2
per £m income

2012

2011

2012

2011

Energy use

Directly  purchased  electricity,  which  generates 

1,179

1,254

6.9

8.3

greenhouse gas emissions

Water

Defi nition

Absolute cubic metres

Supplied water

Consumption  of  piped  water.  No  water  is  extracted 

10,099

7,231

directly by the Group

2012

2011

Normalised cubic 
metres  per £m income

2012

59.3

2011

47.9

Gas, electricity and water usage is based on consumption recorded on purchase invoices. Vehicle fuel usage is based on expense claims and 

recorded mileage and waste generation is based on volumes reported on disposal invoices. 

CO2  values  above  are  calculated  based  on  the  DEFRA  /  DECC  guidelines  published  in  May  2012.  CO2  values  for  the  year  ended                                  
30 September 2011 have been restated for the revised conversion factors published by DEFRA / DECC. Normalised data is based on total 

operating income of £170.2m (2011: £150.9m).

Corporate social responsibility   21

 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Health and Safety policy

It is the Group’s policy to comply with the terms of the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974, and subsequent legislation, and to provide and 

maintain a healthy and safe working environment. The health and safety objective of the Group is to minimise the number of instances of 

occupational accidents and illnesses and ultimately achieve an accident-free workplace.

The Group recognises and accepts its duty to protect the health and safety of all visitors to its premises, including contractors and temporary 

workers, as well as any members of the public who might be affected by our operations.

While the management of the Group will do all within its power to ensure the health and safety of its employees, it is recognised that health and 

safety at work is the responsibility of each and every individual associated with the Group. It is the duty of each employee to take reasonable 

care of their own and other people’s welfare and to report any situation which may pose a threat to the well-being of any other person.

Health and safety policies and procedures are managed by the Group Services Division which liaises with senior management and Human 

Resources as necessary. 

All employees are provided with such equipment, information, training and supervision as is necessary to implement the policy in order to 

achieve the above stated objective. The Group makes available such fi nances and resources deemed reasonable to implement this policy.

All  injuries,  however  small,  sustained  by  a  person  at  work  must  be  reported.  Accident  records  are  crucial  to  the  effective  monitoring  and 

revision of the policy and must therefore be accurate and comprehensive.

The Group recognises the civil and moral need to ensure that all employees adhere to this health and safety policy and is prepared to invoke 

the disciplinary procedure in case of any deliberate disregard for the health and safety policy.

The Group’s health and safety policy is continually monitored and updated, particularly when changes in the scale or nature of our operations 

occur. The policy is updated at least every 12 months.

A  six  monthly  health  and  safety  report  is  produced  by  the  Head  of  Group  Services  for  the  Senior  Management  Group.  Consultants  are 

employed to carry out an annual audit of all health and safety records, including policies, procedures, risk assessments and training records. 

Charitable contributions

The Group contributes to registered charities relating to fi nancial services or serving the local communities in which it operates. Included in 

the charitable contributions shown in the Directors’ Report are contributions of £353,000 (2011: £23,000) made by the Group to the work of 

the Foundation for Credit Counselling which operates the Consumer Credit Counselling Service. The Group has also contributed to charities 

throughout the year by way of single donations. 

The Group’s main objective is to support children’s and local charities although no charity request is overlooked. During the last year the Group 

has  helped  many  and  varied  charities  and  causes  such  as:  Marie  Curie  Cancer  Care,  Children’s  Heart  Foundation,  St  Margaret’s  Parents 

Association, Handicapped Children’s Action Group, Second Chance, The Jennifer Trust, Action for Sick Children, Knowle and Dorridge Lions, 

Brainwave, Butterfl ies Children’s Charity, In Touch, Icandance - disabled children dance school, Chicks, Deafness Research UK, Rotary club 

of  St  Alphege  Youth  Speaks,  The  Neuro  Foundation,  Foundation  for  the  Study  of  Infant  Deaths,  Strongbones  Children’s  Charitable  Trust,    

Happy Days.

The Group also supports Paragon’s Charity Committee, consisting of volunteer employees, which organises a variety of fundraising activities 

throughout the year, raising in the region of £10,000 for the employees’ chosen charity. All employees are given the opportunity to nominate a 

charity and a vote is carried out to select the benefi ciary of the year’s fundraising.

22   Corporate social responsibility

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Report of the Board to the shareholders on 
directors’ remuneration

INTRODUCTORY CHAIRMAN’S LETTER

Dear shareholder

The year ended 30 September 2012 has seen the Group make good progress which has contributed to a signifi cant increase in profi ts. The 

Committee has sought to refl ect this performance in a responsible manner in the decisions it has made in the year.  

During the year the Committee conducted a review of all aspects of its policy on executive director remuneration. This concluded that the 

current policy remains broadly appropriate save that the performance metrics used for future awards of long-term incentives (‘LTIs’) should 

be altered. As a result, future awards of LTIs will have a reduced weighting on relative Total Shareholder Return (‘TSR’), whilst an Earnings Per 

Share (‘EPS’) performance condition will be introduced.

The Committee also reviewed its terms of reference in light of current best practice and a revised version of the Committee’s terms of reference 

is available on request from the Company Secretary.

The key decisions made by the Committee during the year are as follows:

•  Salaries for 2013 have been increased by 3%, broadly in line with increases to other employees

• 

 Performance bonuses of 175% of salary for Mr Terrington and Mr Keen, 125% of salary for Mr Heron and 200% for Mr Woodman have 

been awarded

• 

 Awards of performance shares over shares with a market value of 200% of salary, vesting of half of which is subject to a relative TSR 

performance condition measured against the constituents of the FTSE-250 index (excluding investment trusts) and vesting of half of which 

is subject to an EPS performance condition measured against a retail price index related target, will be awarded shortly

• 

 The Committee consulted with major shareholders prior to fi nalising the decisions above and received broad support

The existing Performance Share Plan will expire in 2013 and the Committee is asking shareholders to approve a replacement plan at the AGM 

in 2013, details of which are given in the notice of AGM being sent to you with these accounts.  

The Board is aware of and supports the requirements for additional remuneration related disclosures announced by BIS earlier this year and 

will seek to comply with the revised requirements when they are fi nalised.

ALAN K FLETCHER

Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

20 November 2012

Report of the Board to the shareholders on directors’ remuneration   23

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

This report has been prepared in accordance with Schedule 8 to the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) 

Regulations 2008 and also sets out how the principles of the UK Corporate Governance Code relating to executive directors’ remuneration 

are applied by the Group. As required by the Regulations, a resolution to approve the report will be proposed at the Annual General Meeting 

of the Company.

Certain parts of this report are required to be audited. Where disclosures are subject to audit, they have been marked as such.

UNAUDITED INFORMATION

Summary of remuneration policy

Purpose

Base salary

Policy

•   Provide  a  competitive  fi xed  cash  component  that  refl ects  the 

•   Remunerate  fairly  for  individual  performance,  having  regard  to 

scope  of  individual  responsibilities  and  recognises  sustained 

the importance of motivation.

individual performance in the role.

•   Take into account remuneration levels in the Group as a whole, 

individual  and  business  performance  and  objective  research 

into comparable companies.

•   Increases  in  salary  for  the  Chairman  and  executive  directors, 

if the Committee is satisfi ed with the individual’s performance, 

normally  broadly  follow  salary  increases  for  the  rest  of  the 

organisation.

•   Increases of 3% have been awarded with effect from 1 October 

2012.  These  are  broadly  in  line  with  increases  for  the  wider 

workforce

Pensions and benefi ts

•  Provide competitive post-retirement benefi ts.

•   1/37.5% of basic annual salary for each year of eligible service, 

capped at 2/3 salary.

•   Cash alternative in lieu of pension accrual, equating to the cost 

to the Company of defi ned benefi t provision, normally reviewed 
every fi ve years.

Annual bonus

•   Incentivise executives to achieve specifi c, predetermined goals 

•   Maximum potential bonus is currently 200% of salary.

during a one year period.

•  Reward individual performance.

•   On-target  bonus  of  100%  of  base  salary,  with  additional 

amounts being awardable for exceptional performance.

•   Encourage retention through a three year deferral of a proportion 

•   Compulsory deferral of 25% of amounts in excess of £50,000, 

of bonus, awarded in shares.

payable  in  shares  after  three  years,  net  of  any  clawback.  A 

higher level of deferral applies in certain circumstances.

•   Performance measures for the year ending 30 September 2013 

will  include,  inter  alia,  profi t,  management  of  the  extant  book 

of  business,  covering  such  aspects  as  managing  customer 

retention,  arrears,  cash  fl ow  and  overall  cost  effi ciency.  Other 

objectives will concern the further development of the Group’s 

new lending business and the development and delivery of new 

strategies to enhance existing income streams.

24   Report of the Board to the shareholders on directors’ remuneration

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Purpose

Policy

Performance Share Plan (‘PSP’)

•   Incentivise  executives 

to  achieve  enhanced 

returns 

for 

•   Awards  of  shares  subject  to  performance  conditions  over  a 

shareholders.

three year performance period.

•  Encourage long-term retention of key executives.

•   Award limit of 200% salary in any year. Awards with a face value 

•  Align the interests of executives and shareholders.

of 200% of salary will be made to executive directors in the year 

to 30 September 2013.

•   Vesting  of  50%  of  awards  granted  in  the  year  ending                                

30  September  2013  will  be  subject  to  a  relative  TSR 

performance condition against the constituents of the FTSE-250 

index, 25% of that proportion will vest for median performance, 

increasing on a straight line basis to full vesting for upper quartile 

performance; and 50% will be subject to an EPS performance 

condition where 25% of that proportion will vest for EPS growth 

equal to the change in the retail price index plus 3%, increasing 

to full vesting for the change in the retail prices index plus 7%.

Matching Share Plan (‘MSP’)

•   Provide additional incentive for executives to achieve enhanced 

•   Key executives invited to invest the after tax equivalent of up to 

returns for shareholders.

•  Encourage long-term retention of key executives.

•   Encourage  key  executives  to  hold  personal  investment  in  the 

Company.

25%  of  salary.  At  the  end  of  a  three  year  performance  period 

and  subject  to  satisfaction  of  performance  criteria  determined 

by the Committee, participants receive a match for shares on a 

two for one basis. No grants will be made under the Matching 

Share Plan during the year ending 30 September 2013.

Remuneration committee

During  the  year,  the  Committee  consisted  of  Alan  Fletcher  (who  chaired  the  Committee),  Peter  Hartill,  Edward  Tilly,  Terence  Eccles  (until 

his  resignation  from  the  Board  on  31  March  2012),  Christopher  Newell  (until  his  resignation  from  the  Board  on  31  October  2011)  and                      

Fiona Clutterbuck (following her appointment to the Board on 12 September 2012), all of whom were independent non-executive directors, 
and the Chairman of the Company, Robert Dench. 

None of the non-executive directors who sit on the Committee has any personal fi nancial interest (other than as a shareholder), confl ict of 

interest arising from cross-directorships or day-to-day involvement in running the business. The Chairman of the Company does not participate 

in discussions on his own remuneration.

The Committee determines the Company’s policy on executive remuneration and specifi c compensation packages for each of the executive 

directors and the Chairman. No director contributes to any discussion about his own remuneration. The Committee also reviews the level and 

structure of remuneration of senior management. 

The terms of reference of the Committee are available on request from the Company Secretary.

In determining the directors’ remuneration for the year, the Committee consulted Mr N S Terrington (Chief Executive) about its proposals. The 

Committee also retains New Bridge Street (‘NBS’), a brand of Aon Hewitt Limited (part of AON plc), as its independent advisor on remuneration 

matters. NBS also advised the Company on various sundry remuneration matters during the year, which did not confl ict with its advice to      

the Committee.

Aon Hewitt provided administration services to the trustees of the Group Retirement Benefi ts Plan during the year. 

Report of the Board to the shareholders on directors’ remuneration   25

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Remuneration policy for the Chairman and executive directors

The Company’s policy is to ensure that the Chairman and the executive directors are fairly rewarded for their individual performance, having 

regard to the importance of retention and motivation. The performance measurement of the Chairman and the executive directors and the 

determination of their annual remuneration packages are undertaken by the Committee. 

In forming and reviewing remuneration policy the Committee has given full consideration to the UK Corporate Governance Code and has 

complied with the Code’s provisions relating to directors’ remuneration throughout the year. Moreover, the Committee has given due regard 

to the link between remuneration and strategy, seeking to ensure that the remuneration structures in place do not encourage excessive risk or 

activities that are not in line with the agreed strategy.

The  remuneration  packages  of  the  individual  directors  are  assessed  after  a  review  of  their  individual  performances  and  an  assessment  of 

comparable positions in the fi nancial sector and within a group of pan-sectoral comparators comprising a number of FTSE-250 companies 

with market capitalisations similar to the Group’s, there now being no directly comparable fi nancial services businesses in the UK.

The executive directors receive a combination of fi xed and performance-related elements of remuneration. Fixed remuneration consists of 

salary,  benefi ts  in  kind  and  pension  scheme  contributions  (see  under  ‘Pension  contributions’  below).  Performance-related  remuneration 

consists of participation in the annual bonus plan, the award of shares under the PSP and invitations to participate in the award of shares under 

the MSP from time to time. The performance-related elements of remuneration are intended to provide a signifi cant proportion of executive 

directors’ potential total remuneration. No award will be made under the MSP in the year to 30 September 2013.

The Committee pays due regard to the levels of remuneration within the Group when determining the remuneration of executive directors and 

other senior employees. It also seeks to ensure that the incentive structure for senior management does not raise environmental, social or 

governance risks by inadvertently motivating irresponsible behaviour.

Salary

The Chairman’s fees and executive directors’ salaries are determined by the Committee at the beginning of each year. In deciding appropriate 

levels, the Committee considers remuneration levels within the Group as a whole, individual and business performance during the year and 

in the past has relied on objective research which gives up-to-date information on comparable FTSE-250 companies. Directors’ contracts 

of  service  will  be  available  for  inspection  at  the  Annual  General  Meeting.  In  view  of  the  progress  made  by  the  Group  during  the  year,  the 

Committee has agreed that the Chairman’s fee and executive directors’ salaries will be increased by 3% from 1 October 2012. This is in line 

with increases for the Group’s wider workforce.

The current salaries of the executive directors with effect from 1 October 2012 are as follows:

•  Mr Terrington 

£434,750

•  Mr Keen 

£325,500

•  Mr Heron 

£231,750

•  Mr Woodman  £231,750

Pension contributions

During the year the executive directors were members of the Group Retirement Benefi ts Plan (the ‘Plan’), to which the Company contributes 

at the same rate as for all members. Dependants of executive directors who are members of the Plan are eligible for a dependant’s pension 

and the payment of a lump sum in the event of death in service. The pension arrangements provide for a pension of 1/37.5 of basic annual 

salary (to a maximum of 2/3) for every year of eligible service. Where pension contributions are capped, additional payments are made to 

enable further provision. 

Prior to the beginning of the year, Mr Terrington and Mr Heron suspended their contributions to the Plan, and the accrual of benefi ts. This 

followed an offer to each director affected by the 2006 ‘A-Day’ changes of the opportunity to terminate permanently further contributions 

in exchange for a cash supplement calculated to equate to the cost of the Company’s contributions towards the executive’s future service 

benefi ts had he stayed within the Plan for his future service accrual, whilst retaining the salary linkage in respect of past service.

26   Report of the Board to the shareholders on directors’ remuneration

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Following an offer by the Company to senior employees to contain the volatility of costs associated with the provision of benefi ts under the 

Plan, Mr Keen and Mr Woodman each ceased pension accrual prior to the beginning of the year in return for a cash supplement calculated to 

equate to the cost of the Company’s contributions towards future service benefi ts had he stayed with the Plan for his future service accrual.

The changes in pension entitlements arising in the fi nancial year, the disclosure of which is required by the Financial Services Authority, are 

given on pages 32 and 33. There have been no changes in the terms of directors’ pension entitlements during the year. There are no unfunded 

promises or similar arrangements for directors. 

Performance bonuses

The  purpose  of  the  bonus  is  to  provide  a  meaningful  cash  incentive  focused  on  improving  the  performance  of  the  Company  through  the 

achievement of a number of predetermined objectives.

The bonus payable to executive directors under the bonus scheme is capped at 200% of salary. 100% of salary is awarded for delivery of 

the base business plan and agreed objectives, with achievement of the planned profi t level forming a major element. Up to 50% additional 

award might be given for achievement of signifi cantly higher profi ts than planned, together with other notable successes over and above the 

agreed objectives. Up to a further 50% might be awarded for performance in excess of the stretch (this could only be achieved for exceptional 

performance). 

To determine the bonus payable, the Committee assessed performance against a number of objectives which were set at the start of the 

fi nancial year. Mr Terrington and Mr Keen were assessed against a balanced scorecard of strategic, fi nancial and operational targets, including 

operating profi t, cash generation, cost control, the development of the Group’s new lending business, borrower retention and the development 

and delivery of new strategies to enhance existing income streams. These performance measures are designed to promote the long-term 

success of the Company by linking to the strategy and specifi c risk factors faced by the Company. Mr Heron was assessed 50% against 

the balanced scorecard and 50% against specifi c new business related objectives. Mr Woodman was assessed 50% against the balanced 

scorecard and 50% against objectives related to the development of new income streams, such as acquisitions and servicing contracts.

In determining bonus levels the Committee has considered the performance of the executive directors and of the Company in relation to the 

adverse  economic  and  market  conditions  prevailing  during  the  year.  The  directors  have  exceeded  their  target  bonus  objectives  to  deliver 

the  Group’s  strategy  including,  inter  alia,  revenue  generation,  portfolio  acquisitions  and  third  party  servicing  contracts,  the  effective  and 

effi cient management of the extant book (including optimising value by maintaining low redemption and arrears rates), maximising cash fl ow 

and  the  development  of  new  lending  and  refreshing  the  Group’s  systems  capabilities  to  increase  business  capacity,  competitiveness  and            

broaden capabilities.

A bonus of 175% of salary has been earned by each of Mr Terrington and Mr Keen for the year. This bonus refl ects very strong individual 
performance and the exceeding of stretch company performance targets in terms of profi ts, cash generated, arrears performance, portfolio 

acquisition  and  servicing  contracts  and  customer  retention.  A  bonus  of  125%  of  salary  has  been  earned  by  Mr  Heron  following  strong 

individual performance, the building up of business volumes during the year whilst concentrating on high quality borrowers and improving the 

processing effi ciency within the new lending business. A bonus of 200% of salary has been earned by Mr Woodman, refl ecting outstanding 

performance in addition to delivering the successful completion of attractive portfolio acquisitions during the year.

Bonus amounts in excess of £50,000 are subject to compulsory 25% deferral, whereby the deferred amount less any clawback (in the event 

of misstatement or misconduct), which can be applied by the Committee in certain specifi c circumstances, is payable in shares after three 

years. In the case of Mr Woodman, this provision applies to his bonus up to and including 150%, with the amount in excess of 150% being 

subjected to a 50% deferral.

The Chairman and non-executive directors are not entitled to receive a bonus and do not participate in the PSP or the MSP.

Report of the Board to the shareholders on directors’ remuneration   27

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Share awards

Executive directors are eligible for awards under the PSP and are entitled to participate in the Paragon UK Sharesave Plan 2009, on the same 

terms as other employees. 

Paragon Performance Share Plan (‘PSP’) 

The PSP has an annual award limit to an individual of shares worth 200% of salary. Awards under the PSP are made from time to time at the 

discretion of the Committee and during the year the executive directors were granted awards over shares equal to 200% of salary.  Awards 

over shares with a market value of 200% of salary will be granted to the executive directors in the year to 30 September 2013.

PSP awards which were granted on or after 21 May 2009 are subject to a performance condition comparing the rank of the Company’s 

TSR  against  a  comparator  group  of  companies  comprising  the  constituents  of  the  FTSE-250  on  the  date  of  grant  over  the  three  years 

commencing on the date of grant. 25% of awards vest for median performance, increasing on a straight line basis to full vesting for upper 

quartile performance.

The FTSE-250 was chosen because it is a broad-based index and because of the lack of comparable listed fi nancial services organisations 

at the current time. The performance conditions are reviewed prior to each future grant to ensure that they remain the most suitable in the 

Company’s  prevailing  circumstances.  The  Committee  believed  that  at  the  time  of  the  grants  TSR  refl ected  the  best  measure  to  align  the 

performance conditions applied with the best interests of the shareholders.

Following discussions with shareholders, the Committee has determined that for awards granted during the fi nancial year ending 30 September 

2013, 50% of awards will be subject to the TSR test and 50% will be subject to an EPS test. In addition, prior to any awards vesting, the 

Committee must be satisfi ed that the requirements of a fi nancial underpin test have been met. Whilst the use of TSR as the sole performance 

measure for grants in prior years was considered by the Committee to be an appropriate measure to refl ect the Company’s objectives, with 

the business now on a stable footing and improved visibility of future earnings, the Committee now intends to include a fi nancial measure. 

The EPS test will apply such that 25% of EPS tested awards will vest where EPS growth is equal to the increase in the retail price index plus 

3%, increasing on a straight line basis to full vesting for EPS growth equal to the increase in the retail price index plus 7% or more. EPS is 

considered appropriate as the second condition as the activities of the Company in developing its new lending and other income streams 

should result in improvements to profi tability and including a profi t measure such as EPS will be refl ective of long term performance. It also 

provides a balance to relative TSR, which is a measure of market expectations of future performance.

Awards are structured as nil cost options with a ten year life.

Paragon Matching Share Plan (‘MSP’)

Under  the  terms  of  the  MSP,  executive  directors  and  senior  management  may,  at  the  discretion  of  the  Committee,  be  invited  to  invest  in 

shares in the Company out of their after-tax cash bonus. Assuming that the executives decide to invest, the shares acquired must remain 

held by the executives for three years. At the end of the three-year period and, subject to satisfaction of performance criteria determined by 

the Committee, the executives will receive a match in shares on a two-for-one basis related to the number of shares which could have been 

purchased with the pre-tax equivalent of the bonus invested.

Executive directors will normally be invited to invest the after-tax equivalent of up to 25% of salary; at such a level, their award is over ‘free’ 

performance-linked matching shares worth 50% of salary. 

The MSP provides the facility to increase the level of potential investment up to the after-tax equivalent of 50% of salary should the Remuneration 

Committee feel in future years that this would be appropriate.

Awards are structured as nil cost options with a ten year life.

28   Report of the Board to the shareholders on directors’ remuneration

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Performance graph

The  following  graph  shows  the  Company’s  TSR  performance  compared  with  the  performance  of  the  FTSE  All  Share  General  Financial 

sector  index.  The  General  Financial  sector  has  been  selected  for  this  comparison  because  it  is  the  sub-sector  index  that  contains  the               

Company’s shares.

Five year return index for the FTSE All Share Financial sector as at 30 September 2012

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

2007

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

FTSE All Share General Financial sector

This graph shows the value, by 30 September 2012, of £100 invested in The Paragon Group of Companies PLC on 30 September 2007, 

compared with £100 invested in the FTSE General Financial sector index. The other points plotted are the values at the intervening fi nancial 

year ends.

Report of the Board to the shareholders on directors’ remuneration   29

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Share ownership guidelines

For a number of years, all executive directors have been encouraged to hold a minimum number of shares in the Company of a value equal to 

their salary, calculated at 30 September each year on the basis of the average price of the Company’s shares over the previous two months. 

The gross value of shares granted under the Deferred Bonus Plan and vested but unexercised shares under the PSP and MSP count towards 

the aggregate shares held by each director in respect of the policy.

Guideline holdings and the actual shares held at 30 September 2012 are set out below:

N S Terrington 

N Keen 

J A Heron 

R J Woodman

Salary (£)     

Average share price (£) † 

422,000 

1.9255 

316,000 

1.9255 

225,000 

1.9255 

225,000

1.9255

Required holding (shares) 

219,164 

164,113 

116,853 

116,853

Shareholding   

Vested PSP 

Deferred Bonus Scheme 

647,972 

1,122,572 

250,544 

368,679 

632,143 

181,426 

252,680 

450,000 

104,357 

89,691

385,714

116,861

Total shares held at 30 September 2012 

2,021,088 

1,182,248 

807,037 

592,266

Surplus shares held 

1,801,924 

1,018,135 

690,184 

475,413

† The above fi gures are based on the average share price for the two months to 30 September 2012

Directors’ contracts

The Chairman and executive directors hold one year rolling contracts in line with current market practice and the Committee reviews the terms 

of these contracts regularly.  

The current contracts are dated as follows: 

R G Dench 

N S Terrington 

N Keen 

J A Heron 

R J Woodman 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

8 February 2007

1 September 1990 (amended 16 February 1993, 30 October 2001 and 10 March 2010)

6 February 1996 (amended 30 October 2001 and 10 March 2010)

1 September 1990 (amended 14 January, 8 February 1993 and 10 March 2010)

8 February 1996 (amended 10 March 2010)

In the event of early termination, the directors’ contracts provide for the payment of one year’s fees / salary, benefi ts, pension and bonus in lieu 

of notice. These would be paid on termination. No provision exists for additional compensation in the event of termination due to a change of 

control of the Company. These arrangements represent the contractual obligations of the Company. New contracts entered into in future will 

not include provision for the payment of bonus in lieu of notice.

Of  the  directors  seeking  re-election  at  the  Annual  General  Meeting,  Mr  R  G  Dench,  Mr  N  S  Terrington,  Mr  N  Keen,  Mr  J  A  Heron  and                  

Mr R J Woodman each has a service contract with the Company.

None of the executive directors currently earns remuneration from external non-executive appointments.

30   Report of the Board to the shareholders on directors’ remuneration

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Non-executive directors

All non-executive directors have specifi c terms of engagement and their remuneration is determined by the Board, subject to the Articles 

of Association. During the year all non-executive directors were paid an annual base fee of £34,450 plus £2,150 for membership of each 

committee, £10,800 for Remuneration Committee and Audit and Compliance Committee chairmanship (inclusive of membership) and £6,500 

for acting as the Senior Independent Director.

Current terms of engagement apply for the following periods:

E A Tilly 

A K Fletcher 

P J N Hartill  

F Clutterbuck 

- 

- 

- 

- 

1 April 2011 to 1 April 2014

25 February 2012 to 25 February 2015

11 February 2011 to 11 February 2014

12 September 2012 to 12 September 2015

Non-executive directors are not eligible to participate in any of the Company’s incentive or pension schemes and are not entitled to receive 

compensation for early termination of their terms of engagement.

Alan  Fletcher,  Chairman  of  the  Remuneration  Committee,  will  be  available  to  answer  questions  on  remuneration  policy  at  the  Annual           

General Meeting.

AUDITED INFORMATION

Directors’ emoluments

The emoluments of directors holding offi ce during the year were:

Chairman 
R G Dench 

Executive 
N S Terrington  

N Keen  

J A Heron    

R J Woodman  

Non-executive 
C D Newell 

E A Tilly  

T C Eccles 

A K Fletcher 

P J N Hartill 

F Clutterbuck   

2012 

2011 

Salary 

and fees 

£000 

Allowances 

and benefi ts 

£000 

Annual 

bonus 

£000 

2012 
Total 
£000 

2011

Total

£000

197 

422 

316 

225 

149 

3 

47 

20 

50 

50 

2 

1,481 

1,327 

12 

14 

19 

11 

8 

-   

-   

-   

-   

-   

-   

64 

57 

-   

209  

201

566  

427  

223  

 322 

-   

-   

-   

-   

-   

-   

1,538 

1,171 

1,002 
762 
459 
479  

3 
47  
20  
50  
50  
2 

3,083 

2,555

966

 734

 443

-

 48

49

46

42

26

-

2,555

Allowances and benefi ts includes benefi ts in kind, comprising private health cover, fuel benefi t, life assurance; and company car provision. The 

company car allowance paid to executive directors (£10,000 - £12,000) is also included in allowances and benefi ts.

Report of the Board to the shareholders on directors’ remuneration   31

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
   
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Directors’ pensions

The  total  amount  charged  to  the  profi t  and  loss  account  of  the  Group  in  respect  of  pension  provision  for  directors  was  £480,000                           

(2011: £435,000).

Mr N S Terrington, Mr N Keen, Mr J A Heron and Mr R J Woodman were members of the Group defi ned benefi t pension plan during the year. 

The amounts shown below describe their entitlement in accordance with paragraph LR 9.8.8(12) of the Listing Rules.

 Increase / (decrease) 

Transfer value 

  in accrued pension 

of increase / 

during year 

(decrease) less 

excluding any 

directors’ 

 increase for infl ation 

contributions 

Accumulated 
total accrued 
pension at 
30 September 
2012 

Accumulated

total accrued

pension at

30 September 

2011 or on

appointment

£000 

£000 

£000 

£000

(2) 

(2) 

(1) 

- 

(28) 

(45) 

(16) 

- 

162 
94 
92 
56 

156

91

88

54

N S Terrington  

N Keen  

J A Heron    

R J Woodman  

The  pension  entitlement  shown  is  that  which  would  be  paid  annually  on  retirement  based  on  service  to  the  following  dates  on  which  the 

director elected to suspend future benefi t accrual within the plan: Mr Terrington and Mr Heron, 6 April 2006; Mr Woodman, 9 October 2007; 

and Mr Keen, 1 April 2011.

The pension entitlements for Messrs Terrington and Heron continue to be linked to pensionable salaries, while Messrs Keen and Woodman 

elected on 1 April 2011 that their benefi ts would no longer be linked to pensionable salaries and their accrued pension fi gures have, therefore, 

been calculated based on a date of leaving of 1 April 2011 with deferred pension revaluation, where relevant.

The increase in accrued pension during the year (and transfer value of the increase) excludes any increase for infl ation. 

The transfer values have been calculated in accordance with the Occupational Pensions Schemes (Transfer Values) Regulations 1996 and the 

Occupational Pensions Schemes (Transfer Values) (Amendment) Regulations 2008, in force from 1 October 2008. 

Members of the plan have the option to pay Additional Voluntary Contributions; neither the contributions nor the resulting benefi ts are included 
in the above table.

The following disclosures describe the pension benefi ts earned in the year in accordance with section 421 of the Companies Act 2006.

 Age at 

Increase in 

Accumulated 

Transfer value 

year end 

accrued 

pension 

in the year 

total accrued 

pension at 

of accrued 

benefi ts at 

year end 

30 September 

N S Terrington  

N Keen  

J A Heron    
R J Woodman  

£000 

£000 

  52 

  54 

  53 
  47 

6 

3 

4 
2 

162 

94 

92 
56 

2011 or on 

appointment 

£000 

2,818 

1,695 

1,639 
903 

Transfer value 
of accrued 
benefi ts at 
30 September 
2012 

Difference

in transfer

values less

contributions

£000 

2,972 
1,776 
1,727 
847 

£000

154

81
88

(56)

The  pension  entitlement  shown  is  that  which  would  be  paid  annually  on  retirement  based  on  service  to  the  following  dates  on  which  the 

director elected to suspend future benefi t accrual within the plan: Mr Terrington and Mr Heron, 6 April 2006; Mr Woodman, 9 October 2007; 

and Mr Keen, 1 April 2011.

32   Report of the Board to the shareholders on directors’ remuneration

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
  
   
 
 
 
  
   
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

The pension entitlements for Messrs Terrington and Heron continue to be linked to pensionable salaries, while Messrs Keen and Woodman 

elected on 1 April 2011 that their benefi ts would no longer be linked to pensionable salaries and their accrued pension fi gures have, therefore, 

been calculated based on a date of leaving of 1 April 2011 with deferred pension revaluation, where relevant.

The contributions shown are those paid or payable by the directors under the terms of the plan. Members of the plan have the option to pay 

Additional Voluntary Contributions; neither the contributions nor the resulting benefi ts are included in the above table.

No contributions have been paid in the year by the directors, as they had all elected to cease future pensionable service in the plan before the 

start of the year.

The increases in transfer values (as shown in the fi nal column) largely refl ect the changes in assumptions underlying the transfer value basis as 

at 30 September 2012 and 30 September 2011, due to changes in fi nancial conditions. The increases also allow for the fact that the accrued 

pension is a year closer to the assumed date of payment. 

The  transfer  value  at  30  September  2012  has  been  calculated  on  the  basis  of  the  Occupational  Pensions  Schemes  (Transfer  Values) 

(Amendment) Regulations 2008. The trustees are responsible for the assumptions and calculation of transfer values, having taken advice from 

the scheme actuary.

The transfer values disclosed above do not represent a sum either paid or currently payable to the individual director by the Group or the 

scheme. Instead they represent a potential liability of the pension scheme should the director request a transfer, calculated at the balance 

sheet date.

During the year the Group made contributions in respect of further pension provision of £150,000 (2011: £134,000) for Mr N S Terrington, 

£192,000  (2011:  £157,000)  for  Mr  N  Keen,  £78,000  (2011:  £67,000)  for  Mr  J  A  Heron  and  £61,000  for  Mr  R  J  Woodman  following                         

his appointment.

Report of the Board to the shareholders on directors’ remuneration   33

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Details of share-based awards

Aggregate gains before taxation made by directors on the exercise of share based awards of £2,691,000 were recorded during the year (2011: 

£nil). At 30 September 2012 the share price of The Paragon Group of Companies PLC was 209.9p per share (2011: 153.5p per share) and 

the range during the year then ended was 138.5p to 219.0p per share (2011: 131.0p to 207.0p per share).

Paragon Performance Share Plan

Awards under this plan comprise a right to acquire shares in the Company for nil or nominal payment and will vest on the third anniversary of 

their grant to the extent that the applicable performance criteria have been satisfi ed. 

Details of individual entitlements of the directors under the Paragon Performance Share Plan at 30 September 2011, or on appointment if later, 

and 30 September 2012 are:

 Award date 

Date from which 

Expiry date 

Market price 

N S Terrington 

N Keen 

J A Heron  R J Woodman

exercisable 

at award 

date 

Number 

Number 

Number 

Number

Awards outstanding at 30 September 2011 or on appointment 

14/06/2007 

26/09/2007 

26/11/2007 

29/09/2008 

21/05/2009 

04/01/2010 

17/12/2010 

14/06/2010 

26/09/2010 

26/11/2010 

29/09/2011 

14/06/2017 

26/09/2017 

26/11/2017 

29/09/2018 

21/05/2012§ 

21/05/2019 

04/01/2013§ 

04/01/2020 

17/12/2013§ 

16/12/2020 

543.00p* 

296.50p* 

130.50p* 

66.50p# 

70.00p# 

135.20p# 

182.00p# 

9,947 

21,127 

29,347 

717,865 

844,286 

451,145 

450,661 

7,454 

15,834 

21,990 

537,920 

632,143 

337,786 

337,424 

4,244 

7,430 

15,651 

382,861 

450,000 

240,458 

240,200 

-

-

-

-

385,714

206,107

205,886

2,524,378 

1,890,551 

1,340,844 

Awards made in the year: 

21/12/2011 

21/12/2014§ 

20/12/2021 

176.90p# 

480,912 

360,114 

256,410 

219,943

Awards exercised in the year: 

14/06/2007 

26/09/2007 

26/11/2007 

29/09/2008 

14/06/2010 

26/09/2010 

26/11/2010 

29/09/2011 

14/06/2017 

26/09/2017 

26/11/2017 

29/09/2018 

543.00p*  

296.50p*  

130.50p*  

66.50p#  

(9,947) 

(21,127) 

(29,347) 

(7,454) 

(15,834) 

(21,990) 

(4,244) 

(7,430) 

(15,651) 

(439,579) 

(537,920) 

(382,861) 

Awards lapsing in the year: 

- 

- 

- 

1,017,650

-

-

-

-

-

At 30 September 2012 

2,505,290 

1,667,467 

1,187,068 

1,017,650

*  price per 10p ordinary share

#  price per £1 ordinary share

§ 

 These  awards  will  be  subject  to  a  performance  condition  comparing  the  rank  of  the  Company’s  TSR  against  a  comparator  group  of 

companies comprising the constituents of the FTSE-250 on the date of grant over the three years commencing on the date of grant. 25% 

of the awards will vest for median performance, increasing on a straight line basis to full vesting for upper quartile performance.

The awards maturing during the year, granted on 21 May 2009, achieved 100% vesting after the application of the performance criteria.

Awards are exercisable from the date on which the Remuneration Committee determines the extent to which the performance conditions have 

been satisfi ed to the tenth anniversary of the grant date. 

34   Report of the Board to the shareholders on directors’ remuneration

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Share option schemes

Details of individual options held by the directors at 30 September 2011, or on appointment if later, and 30 September 2012 are:

 Award date 

Date from which 

Expiry date 

Option price 

N S Terrington 

N Keen 

J A Heron  R J Woodman

exercisable 

Number 

Number 

Number 

Number

Awards outstanding at 30 September 2011 or on appointment 

27/11/2001 

29/07/2002 

14/03/2003 

18/12/2003 

01/12/2004 

27/11/2004 

29/07/2005 

14/03/2006 

18/12/2006 

01/12/2007 

27/11/2011 

29/07/2012 

14/03/2013 

18/12/2013 

01/12/2014 

395.34p 

297.30p 

297.30p 

540.40p 

555.34p 

188,190 

37,638 

119,848 

61,527 

68,874 

- 

37,638 

87,161 

46,261 

51,656 

- 

50,184 

41,269 

25,906 

27,730 

-

43,911

34,666

21,280

22,778

476,077 

222,716 

145,089 

122,635

Awards made in the year: 

Awards exercised in the year: 

Awards lapsing in the year: 

- 

- 

27/11/2001 

29/07/2002 

27/11/2004 

29/07/2005 

27/11/2011 

29/07/2012 

395.34p 

297.30p 

(188,190) 

(37,638) 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

-

-

-

(37,638) 

(50,184) 

(43,911)

At 30 September 2012 

250,249 

185,078 

94,905 

78,724

Deferred bonus shares

Details  of  individual  entitlements  of  the  directors  to  Deferred  Bonus  Shares  at  30  September  2011,  or  on  appointment  if  later,  and                                

30 September 2012 are:

 Award date 

Date from which 

Expiry date 

Market price 

N S Terrington 

N Keen 

J A Heron  R J Woodman

exercisable 

at award 

date 

Number 

Number 

Number 

Number

Awards outstanding at 30 September 2011 or on appointment 

11/01/2010 

20/01/2011 

01/10/2012 

01/10/2013 

30/09/2013 

30/09/2014 

130.60p   

184.00p   

60,098 

82,248 

42,802 

59,672 

27,952 

40,288 

38,435

33,446

142,346 

102,474 

68,240 

Awards made in the year: 

21/12/2011 

01/10/2014 

30/10/2015 

172.63p   

108,198 

78,952 

36,117 

44,980

Awards exercised in the year: 

- 

- 

- 

- 

116,861

At 30 September 2012 

250,544 

181,426 

104,357 

116,861

Report of the Board to the shareholders on directors’ remuneration   35

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

The Deferred Bonus Shares awarded can be exercised for one year from the vesting date. The vesting date is the third anniversary of the start 

of the fi nancial year in which the grant is awarded.

Rights  to  the  following  shares  are  due  to  be  granted  in  respect  of  the  compulsory  deferral  of  performance  bonuses  for  the  year  ended               

30 September 2012. The shares, less any clawback, which can be applied by the Remuneration Committee in certain circumstances, will be 

exercisable by the recipients from 1 October 2015, subject to the recipient being employed by the Company at that time:

N S Terrington 

83,297

N Keen 

J A Heron  

60,854

27,977

R J Woodman 

62,003

Matching Share Plan

The  individual  interests  of  the  directors  in  the  Matching  Share  Plan  at  30  September  2011,  or  on  appointment  if  later,  and                                                                

30 September 2012 are:

 Award date 

Market price 

N S Terrington 

N Keen 

J A Heron  R J Woodman

at award 

date 

Number 

Number 

Number 

Number

Awards outstanding at 30 September 2011 or on appointment 

05/01/2010§ 

133.40p  

43,249 

32,422 

22,868 

43,808

Awards made in the year: 

Awards exercised in the year: 

Awards lapsing in the year: 

At 30 September 2012 

43,249 

32,422 

22,868 

43,808

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

-

-

-

43,249 

32,422 

22,868 

43,808

§ 

 These  awards  will  be  subject  to  a  performance  condition  comparing  the  rank  of  the  Company’s  TSR  against  a  comparator  group  of 
companies comprising the constituents of the FTSE-250 on the date of grant over the three years commencing on the date of grant. 25% 

of the awards will vest for median performance, increasing on a straight line basis to full vesting for upper quartile performance.

Awards are exercisable from the date on which the Remuneration Committee determines the extent to which the performance conditions have 

been satisfi ed to the tenth anniversary of the grant date. 

Signed on behalf of the Board of Directors

ALAN K FLETCHER

Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

20 November 2012

36   Report of the Board to the shareholders on directors’ remuneration

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Statement of directors’ responsibilities
in relation to fi nancial statements

The directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and the fi nancial statements. The directors are required to prepare accounts 

for the Group in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (‘IFRS’) and have also elected to prepare company fi nancial 

statements in accordance with IFRS. In respect of the fi nancial statements for the year ended 30 September 2012, company law requires the 

directors to prepare such fi nancial statements in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards, the Companies Act 2006 and 

Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.  

International  Accounting  Standard  1  –  ‘Presentation  of  Financial  Statements’  requires  that  fi nancial  statements  present  fairly  for  each 

fi nancial year the Company’s fi nancial position, fi nancial performance and cash fl ows. This requires the faithful representation of the effects of 

transactions, other events and conditions in accordance with the defi nitions and recognition criteria for assets, liabilities, income and expenses 

set out in the International Accounting Standards Board’s ‘Framework for the Preparation and Presentation of Financial Statements’. In virtually 

all circumstances, a fair presentation will be achieved by compliance with all applicable International Financial Reporting Standards. Directors 

are also required to:

•  properly select and apply accounting policies;

• 

 present  information,  including  accounting  policies,  in  a  manner  that  provides  relevant,  reliable,  comparable  and  understandable   

information; and

• 

 provide additional disclosures when compliance with the specifi c requirements in International Financial Reporting Standards is insuffi cient 

to enable users to understand the impact of particular transactions, other events and conditions on the entity’s  fi nancial position and 

fi nancial performance.

The directors are responsible for keeping proper accounting records which disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the fi nancial position 

of the company, for safeguarding the assets, for taking reasonable steps for the prevention and detection of fraud and other irregularities and 

for the preparation of a directors’ report and directors’ remuneration report which comply with the applicable requirements of the Companies 

Act 2006.

The directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the Company’s website. Legislation in the United Kingdom governing the 

preparation and dissemination of fi nancial statements differs from legislation in other jurisdictions.

The directors confi rm that, to the best of their knowledge:

• 

 the fi nancial statements, prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union, give 

a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, fi nancial position and profi t or loss of the Company and of the Group taken as a whole; and

• 

 the business review, which is incorporated into the Directors’ Report, includes a fair review of the development and performance of the 

business and the position of the Group taken as a whole, together with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties it faces.

Approved by the Board of Directors and signed on behalf of the Board.

JOHN G GEMMELL

Company Secretary

20 November 2012

Statement of directors’ responsibilities   37

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Independent auditors’ report
To the members of The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

We have audited the fi nancial statements of The Paragon Group of Companies PLC for the year ended 30 September 2012 which comprise 

the consolidated income statement, the consolidated statement of comprehensive income, the consolidated and company balance sheets, 

the consolidated and company cash fl ow statements, the consolidated and company statements of movements in equity and the related 

notes 1 to 59. The fi nancial reporting framework that has been applied in their preparation is applicable by law and International Financial 

Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European Union and, as regards the company fi nancial statements, as applied in accordance 

with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006.

This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. Our 

audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s members those matters we are required to state to them in an 

auditors’ report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other 

than the Company and the Company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

Respective responsibilities of directors and auditors

As  explained  more  fully  in  the  Statement  of  Directors’  Responsibilities,  the  directors  are  responsible  for  the  preparation  of  the  fi nancial 

statements and for being satisfi ed that they give a true and fair view. Our responsibility is to audit and express an opinion on the fi nancial 

statements in accordance with applicable law and International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland). Those standards require us to comply 

with the Auditing Practices Board’s Ethical Standards for Auditors.

Scope of the audit of the fi nancial statements

An audit involves obtaining evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the fi nancial statements suffi cient to give reasonable assurance 

that the fi nancial statements are free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or error. This includes an assessment of: whether 

the  accounting  policies  are  appropriate  to  the  Group’s  and  the  parent  company’s  circumstances  and  have  been  consistently  applied  and 
adequately disclosed; the reasonableness of signifi cant accounting estimates made by the directors; and the overall presentation of the fi nancial 

statements. In addition, we read all the fi nancial and non-fi nancial information in the annual report to identify material inconsistencies with the 

audited fi nancial statements. If we become aware of any apparent material misstatements or inconsistencies we consider the implications for 

our report. 

Opinion on fi nancial statements

In our opinion:

• 

 the fi nancial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the parent company’s affairs as at 30 September 2012 

and of the Group’s profi t for the year then ended;

• 

the group fi nancial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union;

• 

 the parent company fi nancial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union and 

as applied in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006; and

• 

 the fi nancial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the Group 

fi nancial statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.

38   Independent auditors’ report

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Separate opinion in relation to IFRSs as issued by the IASB

As explained in note 3 to the group fi nancial statements, the Group in addition to complying with its legal obligation to apply IFRSs as adopted 

by the European Union, has also applied IFRSs as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB).

In our opinion the Group fi nancial statements comply with IFRSs as issued by the IASB. 

Opinion on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006

In our opinion:

• 

 the  part  of  the  Directors’  Remuneration  Report  to  be  audited  has  been  properly  prepared  in  accordance  with  the  Companies  Act            

2006; and

• 

 the information given in the Directors’ Report for the fi nancial year for which the fi nancial statements are prepared is consistent with the 

fi nancial statements.

Matters on which we are required to report by exception

We have nothing to report in respect of the following:

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:

• 

 adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from 

branches not visited by us; or

• 

 the parent company fi nancial statements and the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited are not in agreement with the 

accounting records and returns; or

•  certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specifi ed by law are not made; or

•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit.

Under the Listing Rules we are required to review:

• 

the directors’ statement, set out on page 44 in relation to going concern;

• 

 the part of the Corporate Governance Statement relating to the Company’s compliance with the nine provisions of the UK Corporate 

Governance Code specifi ed for our review; and

•  certain elements of the report to shareholders by the Board on directors’ remuneration.

Peter Birch (Senior Statutory Auditor)

For and on behalf of Deloitte LLP

Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditor

Birmingham, United Kingdom   

20 November 2012

Independent auditors’ report   39

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Corporate governance

The Board of Directors is committed to the principles of corporate governance contained in the UK Corporate Governance Code (‘Code’) 

issued by the Financial Reporting Council in May 2010 and which is publicly available on their website at www.frc.org. Throughout the year 

ended 30 September 2012 the Company complied with the provisions of the Code except for Code provision B1.2 in relation to the number 

of independent non-executive directors. An explanation of this temporary departure is given in the section of this report headed Directors.

Directors

At the beginning of the year the Board of Directors comprised the Chairman, three executive and fi ve non-executive directors. During the year 

two non-executive directors resigned and one independent non-executive director and one executive director were appointed. 

During the year, owing to health reasons, Terence Eccles decided to step down from the Board of Directors on 31 March before the completion 

of his term of engagement, which would otherwise have extended until February 2013. The process to appoint an independent non-executive 

director  in  his  place  was  put  in  hand  and  Fiona  Clutterbuck  was  appointed  to  the  Board  on  12  September  2012.  Therefore,  between 

these dates the Board comprised the Chairman, four executive and three non-executive directors and the Company was temporarily not in 

compliance with Code provision B1.2. 

Richard Woodman had, for some time, been the senior executive responsible for the Group’s portfolio purchases and investments under the 

Idem Capital brand. In view of the increasing importance of this operation to the development of the Group, the Board determined that his 

role should be allocated a seat on the Board and he was, consequently, appointed an executive director of the Group with the title of Director 

- Corporate Development.

All of the directors bring to the Company a broad and valuable range of experience. All of the then directors were re-elected at the Annual 

General Meeting on 9 February 2012 and all of the serving directors have submitted themselves for re-election at the forthcoming Annual 

General Meeting. The names of the directors in offi ce at the date of this report and their biographical details are set out on pages 12 to 13. 

The division of responsibilities between the Chairman and Chief Executive is clearly established, set out in writing and agreed by the Board. 

There is a strong non-executive representation on the Board, including Edward Tilly, the Senior Independent Director. This provides effective 

balance and challenge. The Board is responsible for overall Group strategy, for approving major agreements, transactions and other fi nancing 

matters and for monitoring the progress of the Group against budget. All directors receive suffi cient relevant information on fi nancial, business 
and corporate issues prior to meetings and there is a formal schedule of matters reserved for decision by the Board, which includes material 

asset acquisitions and disposals, granting and varying authority levels of the Chairman and the executive directors, determination and approval 

of the Group’s objectives, strategy and annual budget, investment decisions, corporate governance policies and fi nancial and dividend policies.

The Chairman’s other business commitments are set out in the biographical details on page 12 and there have been no signifi cant changes 

during the period to those commitments. 

There  were  nine  regular  Board  meetings  during  the  year.  Robert  Dench,  Nigel  Terrington,  Alan  Fletcher  and  Peter  Hartill  attended  all  nine 

of the Board meetings during the year ended 30 September 2012, Nicholas Keen, John Heron and Edward Tilly attended eight meetings,         

Richard  Woodman  attended  six  of  the  seven  meetings  held  following  his  appointment  to  the  Board,  Fiona  Clutterbuck  attended  the  one 

meeting held following her appointment to the Board and Terence Eccles attended one out of the four meetings held prior to his resignation 

owing to ill health. Christopher Newell did not attend the one meeting held prior to his resignation.

All  of  the  non-executive  directors  are  independent  of  management  and  all  are  appointed  for  fi xed  terms.  They  are  kept  fully  informed  of 

all  relevant  operational  and  strategic  issues  and  bring  a  strongly  independent  and  experienced  judgement  to  bear  on  these  issues.  In        

November 2010 Christopher Newell’s appointment, following nine years on the Board, was extended for a further 12 months to enable an 

orderly handover of the Chairmanship of the Audit and Compliance Committee after the expected appointment of an appropriately qualifi ed 

person.  Mr Newell resigned from the Board on 31 October 2011 and the Board considers that he remained independent throughout the time 

of his appointment until his resignation. 

Prior to 1 October 2008 the Board approved a set of guiding principles on managing confl icts and agreed a process to identify and authorise 

any confl icts which might arise. At each meeting of the Board actual or potential confl icts of interest in respect of any director are reviewed.

40   Corporate governance

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

All  directors  have  access  to  the  advice  and  services  of  the  Company  Secretary,  who  is  responsible  to  the  Board  for  ensuring  that  board 

procedures are complied with. Both the appointment and removal of the Company Secretary are matters for the Board as a whole.

All directors are able to take independent professional advice in the furtherance of their duties whenever it is considered appropriate to do so 

and have access to such continuing professional development opportunities as are identifi ed as appropriate in the Board appraisal process.

The Board also operates through a number of committees covering certain specifi c matters, these being:

• 

 The Remuneration Committee, which during the year consisted of Alan Fletcher (who chairs the Committee), Fiona Clutterbuck (since 

her appointment to the Board on 12 September 2012), Peter Hartill, Edward Tilly, Terence Eccles (until his resignation from the Board on 

31 March 2012) and Christopher Newell (until his resignation from the Board on 31 October 2011), all of whom were independent non-

executive directors, and the Chairman of the Company, Robert Dench.  

 During the year ended 30 September 2012 there were fi ve meetings of the Remuneration Committee. All meetings were attended by    

Alan  Fletcher,  Robert  Dench,  Peter  Hartill  and  Edward  Tilly  and  the  one  meeting  held  following  Fiona  Clutterbuck’s  appointment  was 

attended by her. Terence Eccles did not attend the one meeting of the Committee prior to his resignation and no meetings were held prior 

to the resignation of Christopher Newell. 

 Further information about the Remuneration Committee is given in the Report of the Board to the Shareholders on Directors’ Remuneration 

on pages 23 to 36.

• 

 The Audit and Compliance Committee, which during the year consisted of Peter Hartill (who chairs the Committee), Fiona Clutterbuck 

(since her appointment to the Board on 12 September 2012), Alan Fletcher, Edward Tilly, Terence Eccles (until his resignation from the 

Board on 31 March 2012) and Christopher Newell (until his resignation from the Board on 31 October 2011), all of whom were independent 

non-executive directors. The Board is satisfi ed that all members of the Committee have recent and relevant fi nancial experience. The 

Committee meets at least three times per year.

 During the year ended 30 September 2012 there were three meetings of the Audit and Compliance Committee, all of which were attended 

by Peter Hartill, Alan Fletcher and Edward Tilly and the one meeting held following the appointment of Fiona Clutterbuck was attended 

by her. No meetings were held prior to the resignation of Christopher Newell and Terence Eccles did not attend the one meeting of the 

Committee prior to his resignation.

Further information about the work of the Audit and Compliance Committee is given below.

• 

 The Nomination Committee, consisting of Robert Dench, who chairs the Committee, Nigel Terrington and all of the non-executive directors, 

ensuring that a majority of the Committee’s members are independent non-executive directors. The Committee is convened as required 

to nominate candidates for membership of the Board, although ultimate responsibility for appointment rests with the Board. There were 

two meetings of the Committee during the year to consider the appointment of a new non-executive director, resulting in the appointment 

of Fiona Clutterbuck to the Board on 12 September 2012. All members of the Committee attended both meetings. The Committee only 
engages in the process of identifi cation of suitable candidates for appointment to the Board when requested by the Board to do so. 

 There is a formal process for the appointment of directors, starting with a review of the Board structure, size and composition, leading 

to the preparation of a written specifi cation of the skills required and the identifi cation of suitable candidates. The Nomination Committee 

ensures that prospective non-executive directors can devote suffi cient time to the appointment. The Board recognises the benefi ts that 

can  fl ow  from  non-executive  directors  holding  other  appointments  but  requires  them  to  seek  the  agreement  of  the  Chairman  before 

entering into any commitments that might affect the time they can devote to the Company. The choice of appointee is based entirely         

on merit.

• 

 The Asset and Liability Committee, consisting of appropriate heads of functions and chaired by Nigel Terrington, the Chief Executive. The 

Committee  meets  regularly  and  monitors  Group  liquidity  risks,  interest  rate  risks,  currency  risks  and  treasury  counterparty  exposures. 
Further  information  on  the  Group’s  fi nancial  risk  management  procedures  and  the  Committee’s  part  in  them  is  given  in  note  6  to                     
the accounts.

• 

 The Credit Committee, consisting of appropriate heads of functions and chaired by Nicholas Keen, the Finance Director. It meets regularly 

and is responsible for establishing credit policy and monitoring compliance therewith.

All Board committees operate within defi ned terms of reference and suffi cient resources are made available to them to undertake their duties. 

The  terms  of  reference  of  the  Remuneration  Committee,  Audit  and  Compliance  Committee  and  Nomination  Committee  are  available  on 

request from the Company Secretary.

Corporate governance   41

 
 
 
  
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

The composition of the Board and its committees is kept under review, with the aim of ensuring that there is an appropriate balance of power 

and authority between executive and non-executive directors and that the directors collectively possess the skills and experience necessary 

to direct the Company and the Group’s business activities.

There is an established process for external appointments through the Nomination Committee. Ultimately, the appointment of any new director 

is a matter for the Board. Executive director appointments are based upon merit and business need. Non-executive appointments are based 

upon the candidates’ profi les matching those drawn up by the Nomination Committee. In all cases the Board approves the appointment only 

after careful consideration.

The Board, individual directors and Board committees are appraised annually. The performance of the Chief Executive is appraised by the 

Chairman. The performance of the other executive directors is appraised by the Chief Executive in conjunction with the Chairman. The results 

of these appraisals are presented to the Remuneration Committee for consideration and determination of remuneration.

During the year the Board conducted a formal and rigorous performance review, which was conducted internally. All Board directors participated 

and discussed a list of questions on Board and Committee performance. An externally facilitated evaluation had been carried out during the 

previous year.

At the Annual General Meeting the Chairman will confi rm to shareholders, when proposing the re-election of any non-executive director, that, 

following formal performance evaluation, the individual’s performance continues to be effective and demonstrates commitment to the role.

The non-executive directors meet at least annually to review the performance of the Chairman.

Directors’ remuneration

The Remuneration Committee reviews the performance of executive directors and members of senior management prior to determining its 

recommendations on annual remuneration, performance bonuses and share options for the Board’s determination.

The Report of the Board to the Shareholders on Directors’ Remuneration is on pages 23 to 36.

Relations with shareholders

The Board encourages communication with the Company’s institutional and private investors. All shareholders have at least 20 working days’ 

notice of the Annual General Meeting at which the directors and committee chairmen are available for questions. The Annual General Meeting 

is held in London during business hours and provides an opportunity for directors to report to investors on the Group’s activities and to answer 

their  questions.  Shareholders  have  an  opportunity  to  vote  separately  on  each  resolution  and  all  proxy  votes  lodged  are  counted  and  the 

balance for and against each resolution is announced. 

The Chairman, Chief Executive and Finance Director have a full programme of meetings with institutional investors during the course of the year 

and investors comments are communicated to all members of the Board. The Chairman and the Chairman of the Remuneration Committee 

hold annual meetings with leading shareholders to discuss remuneration policies and other corporate governance matters and the comments 

received  are  reported  to  the  Board  and  considered  by  the  Remuneration  Committee  in  determining  or  varying  the  Group’s  approach  to 

executive compensation.

The Company’s web site at www.paragon-group.co.uk provides access to information on the Company and its businesses.

Accountability and audit

Detailed reviews of the performance of the Group’s main business lines are included within the Chairman’s Statement and Chief Executive’s 

Review. The Board uses these, together with the Directors’ Report on pages 14 to 17 to present a balanced and understandable assessment 

of the Company’s position and prospects. 

The directors’ responsibility for the fi nancial statements is described on page 37.

42   Corporate governance

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

An  on-going  process  for  identifying,  evaluating  and  managing  the  signifi cant  risks  faced  by  the  Group,  which  is  regularly  reviewed  by  the 

Board, was in place for the year ended 30 September 2012 and to the date of these fi nancial statements. The directors confi rm that they have 

reviewed the effectiveness of the Group’s system of internal control for this period and that these procedures accord with the guidance ‘Internal 

Controls: Guidance for Directors on the Combined Code’.

The directors are responsible for the system of internal control throughout the Group, including the system of internal control over fi nancial 

reporting, and for reviewing its effectiveness. Such a system is designed to manage rather than eliminate the risk of failure to achieve business 

objectives, and can provide reasonable, but not absolute, assurance against the risk of material misstatement or loss and that assets are 

safeguarded against unauthorised use or disposition. In assessing what constitutes reasonable assurance, the directors have regard to the 

relationship between the cost and benefi ts from particular aspects of the control system.

The  system  of  internal  control  includes  documented  procedures  covering  accounting,  compliance,  risk  management,  personnel  matters 

and operations, clear reporting lines, delegation of authority through a formal structure of mandates, a formalised budgeting, management 

reporting and review process, the use of key performance indicators throughout the Group and regular meetings of the Asset and Liability and 

Credit Committees and senior management.

Internal control over fi nancial reporting within the Group is provided by a process designed, under the supervision of the Finance Director and 

senior fi nancial management of the Group, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of fi nancial reporting and the preparation 

of fi nancial statements for external reporting purposes, including the process of preparing the Group’s consolidated fi nancial statements.

Internal  control  over  fi nancial  reporting  includes  policies  and  procedures  intended  to  ensure  that  records  are  maintained  that  fairly,  and  in 

reasonable detail, refl ect transactions and dispositions of assets, to provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary 

to  permit  the  preparation  of  the  fi nancial  statements,  to  ensure  that  receipts  and  expenditures  are  only  being  made  in  accordance  with 

management authorisation and to provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorised acquisition, use or 

disposition of assets that could have a material effect on the fi nancial statements.

Internal control systems, no matter how well designed, have inherent limitations and may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections 

of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that internal controls may become inadequate because of changes 

in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may reduce.

The Board receives regular reports setting out key performance and risk indicators. In addition, the Board operates a formal risk management 

process, from which the key risks facing the business are identifi ed. The process results in reports to the Board on how these risks are being 

managed. The Board has a programme of regular presentations from senior management to enable the Board to review the operation of 

internal controls in relation to the risks associated with their specifi c areas.

The system of internal control is monitored by management and by an internal audit function that concentrates on the areas of greater risk and 

reports its conclusions regularly to management and the Audit and Compliance Committee. The internal audit work plan is approved annually 
by the Audit and Compliance Committee, which reviews the effectiveness of the system of internal control annually and reports its conclusions 

to the Board.

Audit and Compliance Committee

The Audit and Compliance Committee, comprising the independent non-executive directors of the Group, monitors the integrity of the Group’s 

fi nancial reporting, reviews the Group’s internal control and risk management systems, monitors and reviews the effectiveness of the Group’s 

internal audit function, monitors the relationship between the Group and the external auditors and provides a forum through which the Group’s 

external and internal audit functions report to the non-executive directors. The Committee is also responsible for ensuring that the system and 

controls for regulatory compliance are effective.

The Committee reviews the scope and the results of the annual external audit, its cost effectiveness and the independence and objectivity 

of the external auditors. Before recommending the re-appointment of the external auditors, who have served since 1985, to the Board, the 

Committee engaged with the auditors to ensure that they are still providing the required quality of service and remained independent. The 

Committee  considered  the  auditors’  understanding  of  the  Group’s  business,  their  access  to  appropriate  fi nancial  services  and  regulatory 

specialists within their fi rm, both locally and nationally, and their understanding of the sectors in which the Group operates, together with 

the performance of the audit, the auditors’ conduct of their relationship with the Group and the requirements of the Group’s fi nancial control 

process and have concluded that the needs of the Group would not be best served by putting the external audit out to tender at this time. The 

Committee has not identifi ed any factors which might restrict its choice of external auditor. 

Corporate governance   43

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Both the Audit and Compliance Committee and the external auditors have in place safeguards to avoid any compromise of the independence 

and objectivity of the external auditors. The Committee considers the independence of the external auditors annually and the Group has a 

formal policy for the engagement of its external auditors to supply non-audit services. The policy is designed to ensure that neither the nature 

of the service to be provided nor the level of reliance placed on the services could impact the objectivity of the external auditors’ opinion on 

the Group’s fi nancial statements.

The policy precludes the appointment of the external auditors to provide any service where there is involvement in management functions or 

decision making, or any service on which management may place primary reliance in determining the adequacy of internal controls, fi nancial 

systems  or  fi nancial  reporting.  The  external  auditors  may  provide  corporate  fi nance  and  similar  services  (provided  there  is  no  signifi cant 

advocacy role) or tax services but, if the advice given or the position taken would be material to the Group, the prior consent of the Committee 

would be required. Internal audit services may only be provided by the external auditor where acting under the instruction of Internal Audit 

management and with the prior consent of the Committee. Other services may be procured by management without the prior consent of the 

Committee, but are reported to the Committee on an ongoing basis.

Fees paid to the external auditors are shown in note 16 to the Accounts. Other than services required to be provided by external auditors by 

legislation or regulation, non-audit services relate to taxation and to corporate fi nance activity. In respect of taxation services the Committee 

has considered the services provided and concluded that the understanding of the Group and the industry demonstrated by the advisers make 

them well placed to meet the Group’s needs. In respect of the corporate fi nance services, the external auditors fi rm was selected to provide 

these  services  as  they  were  considered  to  offer  the  most  appropriate  skills  and  experience  for  the  projects  concerned  in  a  cost-effective 

manner. Other potential providers were considered and the use of the external auditors fi rm was approved by the Committee after having 

received  confi rmation  from  the  auditors  that  they  had  taken  specifi c  steps  to  protect  their  independence  in  accordance  with  the  Auditing 

Practices Board’s Revised Ethical Standards for Auditors. During the course of the year accounting fi rms other than the external auditors have 

been engaged for particular assignments.

At each meeting the Audit and Compliance Committee receives reports of reviews conducted throughout the Group by the Internal Audit and, 

from time to time, compliance functions.

The Chairman, the executive directors, Director of Financial Accounting and Group Company Secretary, Director of Legal Services, Head of 

Internal Audit and a partner and other representatives from the external auditors normally attend meetings of the Committee at the invitation 

of the Chairman of the Committee.

Going concern basis

The business activities of the Group, its current operations and those factors likely to affect its future results and development, together with 

a description of its fi nancial position and funding position, are described in the Chairman’s Statement on pages 4 to 6 and Chief Executive’s 

review on pages 7 to 11. The principal risks and uncertainties affecting the Group, and the steps taken to mitigate these risks are described 

on pages 45 to 46.

Note 5 to the accounts includes an analysis of the Group’s working capital position and policies, while note 6 includes a detailed description of 

its funding structures, its use of fi nancial instruments, its fi nancial risk management objectives and policies and its exposure to credit, interest 

rate and liquidity risk. Critical accounting estimates affecting the results and fi nancial position disclosed in this annual report are discussed in 

note 4.

As described under ‘Accountability and Audit’ above, the Group has a formalised process of budgeting, reporting and review, which provides 

information to the directors which is used to ensure the adequacy of resources available for the Group to meet its business objectives.

The securitisation funding structures described in note 6 ensure that a substantial proportion of the Group’s originated loan portfolio is match-

funded to maturity. Repayment of the securitisation borrowings is restricted to funds generated by the underlying assets and there is limited 

recourse to the Group’s general funds. Recent and current loan originations utilising the Group’s available warehouse facilities described in note 

6 are refi nanced through securitisation from time to time. The Group’s only working capital debt is the £110.0 million corporate bond which 

does not mature until 2017.  As a consequence the directors believe that the Group is well placed to manage its business risks successfully 

despite the current uncertain economic outlook.

After making enquiries, the directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group will have adequate resources to continue in operational 

existence  for  the  foreseeable  future.  For  this  reason,  they  continue  to  adopt  the  going  concern  basis  in  preparing  the  annual  report                         

and accounts.

44   Corporate governance

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Principal risks and uncertainties

There are a number of potential risks and uncertainties which could have a material impact on the Group’s performance and could cause 

actual results to differ materially from expected and historical results. The Group’s system of risk management, which includes risk review and 

an active internal audit function, is monitored by the Audit and Compliance Committee as described in the ‘Corporate Governance’ section of 

this Annual Report on pages 40 to 44.

The principal risks to which the Group is exposed include the following:

Economic environment

A further deterioration in the general economy may adversely affect all aspects of the Group’s business. Adverse economic conditions might 

increase the number of borrowers that default on their loans or adversely affect funding structures, which may in turn increase the Group’s 

costs and could result in losses on some of the Group’s assets, or restrict the ability of the Group to develop in the future.

The general economic factors affecting the Group in the period going forward, together with the steps taken by the Group’s management to 

address these issues are described in more detail in the Chairman’s statement on pages 4 to 6 and the Chief Executive’s review on pages 7 

to 11.

Changes in interest rates may adversely affect the Group’s net income and profi tability. The steps taken by the Group to mitigate against the 

long term effects of interest rate movements, through the structuring of its products and the use of hedging procedures are described in note 

6 to the accounts.

Credit risk

As a primary lender the Group faces credit risk as an inherent component of its lending and asset purchase activities. Adverse changes in the 

credit quality of the Group’s borrowers, a general deterioration in UK economic conditions or adverse changes arising from systematic risks in 

UK and global fi nancial systems could reduce the recoverability and value of the Group’s assets.

The Group’s approach to the management of credit risk and the systems in place to mitigate that risk on both originated and purchased assets 

are described in the section of note 6 to the accounts entitled ‘Credit Risk’.

Operational risk

The activities of the Group subject it to operational risks relating to its ability to implement and maintain effective systems to process the high 

volume of transactions with customers. A signifi cant breakdown of the IT systems of the Group might adversely impact the ability of the Group 

to operate its business effectively.

To address these risks, the Group’s internal audit function carries out targeted reviews of critical systems to ensure that they remain adequate 

for their purpose. The Group has a business continuity plan, which is kept under regular review and is designed to ensure that any breakdown 

in systems would not cause signifi cant disruption to the business.

Principal risks and uncertainties   45

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Competitor risk

The Group faces strong competition in all of the core markets in which it operates. There is a danger that its profi tability and /or market share 

may be impaired.

To mitigate this risk the Group maintains relationships with its customers, business introducers and other signifi cant participants in the markets 

in  which  it  is  active,  as  well  as  being  active  in  industry-wide  organisations  and  initiatives.  This  enables  market  trends  to  be  identifi ed  and 

addressed within the relevant business strategy.

Governmental, legislative and regulatory risk

The market sectors to which the Group supplies products, and the capital markets from which it obtains much of its funding, have been 

subject to intervention by United Kingdom Government, European Union and other regulatory bodies. Current regulatory developments are 

discussed in the section of the Chief Executive’s Review headed ‘Regulation’ on page 10. To the extent that such actions disadvantage the 

Group, when compared to other market participants, they present a risk to the Group. 

In order to mitigate this risk the Group has been active in explaining its position to the authorities in order that it is not inadvertently disadvantaged. 

Management

The success of the Group is dependent on recruiting and retaining skilled senior management and personnel. 

The Group’s employment policies, which are designed to ensure that an appropriately skilled workforce is, and remains, in place are described 

within the Corporate Social Responsibility section of this Annual Report on pages 18 and 19. 

Working capital

The Group’s capital position and its policies in respect of capital management are described in note 5 to the accounts. These policies and their 
application are described more fully in the section of the Chairman’s Statement headed ‘Capital Management’ on pages 4 and 5.

Financial risk

The Group’s exposure to other fi nancial risks, including liquidity risk and foreign currency risk, and the procedures in place to mitigate those 

risks are described in detail in note 6 to the accounts.

46   Principal risks and uncertainties

From 3 December 2012
51 Homer Road
Solihull
West Midlands B91 3QJ

 Contacts 

Registered and head offi ce

To 3 December 2012 
St Catherine’s Court 
Herbert Road 
Solihull 
West Midlands B91 3QE

Telephone: 0121 712 2323

 London offi ce
Tower 42 Level 12
25 Old Broad Street
London EC2N 1HQ

Telephone: 020 7786 8474

 Internet

www.paragon-group.co.uk

 Auditors
Deloitte LLP
Chartered Accountants
Four Brindleyplace
Birmingham B1 2HZ

 Solicitors
Slaughter and May
One Bunhill Row
London EC1Y 8YY

 Registrars and transfer offi ce
Computershare Investor Services PLC
The Pavilions 
Bridgwater Road
Bristol BS99 6ZZ

Telephone: 0870 707 1244

  UBS Limited

1 Finsbury Avenue 
London EC2M 2PP

Brokers
Jefferies Hoare Govett Limited 
Vintners Place   
68 Upper Thames Street  
London EC4V 3BJ

Remuneration consultants
New Bridge Street
10 Devonshire Square
London EC2M 4YP

Consulting actuaries
Mercer Limited
Four Brindleyplace
Birmingham B1 2JQ

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Contacts   47

 
 
   
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

48   Annual Reports and Accounts 2012

The accounts

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

The accounts   49

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Consolidated income statement
For the year ended 30 September 2012

Interest receivable  

Interest payable and similar charges 

Net interest income 
Other operating income 

Total operating income 
Operating expenses 

Provisions for losses 

Operating profi t before gains and fair value items 
Fair value net gains / (losses) 

Operating profi t being profi t on ordinary activities before taxation 
Tax charge on profi t on ordinary activities 

Profi t on ordinary activities after taxation for the fi nancial year 

Earnings per share 

- basic 

- diluted 

The results for the current and preceding years relate entirely to continuing operations. 

Note 

9 

10 

11 

12 

17 

18 

19 

2012 
£m 

293.8 
(136.0) 

157.8 
12.4 

170.2 
(51.9) 
(24.1) 

94.2 
1.3 

95.5 
(23.3) 

72.2 

2011

£m

258.0

(122.2)

135.8

15.1

150.9

(45.4)

(24.4)

81.1

(0.3)

80.8

(21.2)

59.6

Note 

2012 

2011

21 

21 

24.2p 
23.5p 

20.2p

19.6p

50   Consolidated income statement

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Consolidated statement of 
comprehensive income
For the year ended 30 September 2012

Profi t for the year 

Other comprehensive income  
Actuarial (loss) on pension scheme   

Cash fl ow hedge (losses) / gains 

taken to equity 

Tax on items taken directly 

to equity   

Other comprehensive income for 

the year net of tax 

Total comprehensive income for the year 

Note 

£m 

2012 

£m 

72.2 

2011

£m 

£m

59.6

50 

42 

22 

(0.5) 

(1.5) 

0.2 

(0.3) 

0.4 

(0.3) 

(1.8) 

70.4 

(0.2)

59.4

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income   51

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Consolidated balance sheet
30 September 2012

Note 

2012 
£m 

2011 

£m 

2010

£m

Assets employed 
Non-current assets 
Intangible assets  

Property, plant and equipment 

Financial assets 

Deferred tax asset 

Current assets 
Other receivables 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Total assets   

Financed by   
Equity shareholders’ funds 
Called-up share capital 

Reserves     

Share capital and reserves 

Own shares 

Total equity   

Current liabilities 
Financial liabilities 

Current tax liabilities 

Other liabilities  

Non-current liabilities 
Financial liabilities 

Retirement benefi t obligations 

Deferred tax 

Other liabilities  

Total liabilities 

23 

25 

28 

51 

36 

37 

38 

39 

46 

47 

52 

53 

47 

50 

51 

53 

9.1 
10.7 
9,505.2 

- 

9.3 

11.4 

9,891.2 

- 

9.2

12.2

10,080.1

1.5

9,525.0 

9,911.9 

10,103.0

7.3 
504.8 

512.1 

4.7 

571.6 

576.3 

5.9

536.7

542.6

10,037.1 

10,488.2 

10,645.6

301.8 
550.2 

852.0 
(48.5) 

803.5 

2.0 
13.3 
36.7 

52.0 

9,159.0 
13.9 
7.6 
1.1 

299.7 

490.7 

790.4 

(48.4) 

742.0 

1.8 

10.7 

38.3 

50.8 

299.4

445.8

745.2

(53.2)

692.0

1.2

16.2

32.4

49.8

9,674.5 

9,885.7

14.4 

5.0 

1.5 

16.5

-

1.6

9,903.8

9,953.6

9,181.6 

9,695.4 

9,233.6 

9,746.2 

10,037.1 

10,488.2 

10,645.6

Approved by the Board of Directors on 20 November 2012.

Signed on behalf of the Board of Directors

N S TERRINGTON 
Chief Executive 

N KEEN
Finance Director

52   Consolidated balance sheet

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Company balance sheet
30 September 2012

Note 

25 

26 

28 

36 

37 

38 

39 

46 

47 

52 

53 

47 

53 

2012 
£m 

6.7 
622.6 
- 

629.3 

80.1 
124.5 

204.6 

833.9 

301.8 
373.8 

675.6 
(39.5) 

636.1 

1.4 
4.4 
71.1 

76.9 

120.2 
0.7 

120.9 

197.8 

833.9 

2011 

£m 

7.7 

746.9 

4.0 

758.6 

80.0 

189.2 

269.2 

2010

£m

8.8

764.4

8.0

781.2

125.8

143.6

269.4

1,027.8 

1,050.6

299.7 

322.2 

621.9 

(39.5) 

582.4 

1.2 

3.3 

316.5 

321.0 

123.6 

0.8 

124.4 

445.4 

299.4

269.4

568.8

(39.5)

529.3

1.1

1.5

389.2

391.8

128.6

0.9

129.5

521.3

1,027.8 

1,050.6

Assets employed 

Non-current assets 
Property, plant and equipment 

Investment in subsidiary undertakings 

Financial assets 

Current assets 
Other receivables 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Total assets   

Financed by   
Equity shareholders’ funds 
Called-up share capital 

Reserves     

Share capital and reserves 

Own shares 

Total equity   

Current liabilities 
Financial liabilities 

Current tax liabilities 

Other liabilities  

Non-current liabilities 
Financial liabilities 

Other liabilities  

Total liabilities 

Approved by the Board of Directors on 20 November 2012.

Signed on behalf of the Board of Directors

N S TERRINGTON 
Chief Executive 

N KEEN
Finance Director

Company balance sheet   53

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Consolidated cash fl ow statement
For the year ended 30 September 2012

Note 

54 

55 

56 

Net cash generated by operating activities 

Net cash (utilised) by investing activities 

Net cash (utilised) by fi nancing activities 

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 

Opening cash and cash equivalents  

Closing cash and cash equivalents 

Represented by balances within:  

 Cash and cash equivalents   

 Financial liabilities 

Company cash fl ow statement
For the year ended 30 September 2012

Note 

54 

55 

56 

Net cash (utilised by) / generated by operating activities 

Net cash generated by investing activities 

Net cash (utilised) by fi nancing activities 

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 

Opening cash and cash equivalents  

Closing cash and cash equivalents 

Represented by balances within:  

 Cash and cash equivalents   

 Financial liabilities 

2012 
£m 

117.3 
(2.2) 
(181.9) 

(66.8) 
571.0 

504.2 

504.8 
(0.6) 

504.2 

2012 
£m 

(60.9) 
7.6 
(11.4) 

(64.7) 
189.2 

124.5 

124.5 
- 

124.5 

2011

£m

246.1

(2.1)

(209.6)

34.4

536.6

571.0

571.6

(0.6)

571.0

2011

£m

41.5

16.0

(11.9)

45.6

143.6

189.2

189.2

-

189.2

54   Consolidated cash fl ow statement / Company cash fl ow statement

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Statement of movements in equity
For the year ended 30 September 2012

Note 

44 

45 

13 

22 

Total comprehensive income for the year 

Dividends paid 

Net movement in own shares 

(Defi cit) / surplus on transactions in own shares 

Charge for share based remuneration 

Tax on share based remuneration 

Net movement in equity in the year   

Equity at 30 September 2011 

Equity at 30 September 2012 

  The Group 

The Company

2012 

£m 

70.4 
(12.3) 
(0.1) 
(0.2) 
2.8 
0.9 

61.5 
742.0 

803.5 

2011 

£m 

59.4 

(11.1) 

4.8 

(5.2) 

2.0 

0.1 

50.0 

692.0 

742.0 

2012 
£m 

61.1 
(12.3) 
- 
2.1 
2.8 
- 

53.7 
582.4 

636.1 

2011

£m

61.9

(11.1)

-

0.3

2.0

-

53.1

529.3

582.4

Statement of movements in equity   55

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Notes to the accounts
For the year ended 30 September 2012

1.  GENERAL INFORMATION

The Paragon Group of Companies PLC is a company domiciled in the United Kingdom and incorporated in England and Wales under the 

Companies Act 2006 with company number 2336032. The address of the registered offi ce is given on page 47. The nature of the Group’s 

operations and its principal activities are set out in the Directors’ Report on pages 14 to 17.

These fi nancial statements are presented in pounds sterling, which is the currency of the economic environment in which the Group operates.

2.  ADOPTION OF NEW AND REVISED REPORTING STANDARDS

In the preparation of these fi nancial statements the following reporting standards are being applied for the fi rst time.

• 

IAS 24 (Revised) – ‘Related Party Disclosures’;

•  Amendment to IFRS 7 – ‘Financial Instruments: Disclosures’; and

•  Amendment to IFRIC 14 – ‘Prepayments of a Minimum Funding Requirement’.

The  application  of  these  standards  has  not  required  any  amendments  to  disclosures  previously  reported,  nor  would  the  present  fi nancial 

statements have differed had these standards not been applied.

At the date of authorisation of these fi nancial statements the following International Financial Reporting Standards and Interpretations, which 

have not been applied in these fi nancial statements, were in issue but not yet effective:

• 

IFRS 9 – ‘Financial Instruments’

• 

IFRS 10 – ‘Consolidated Financial Statements’

• 

IFRS 11 – ‘Joint Arrangements’

• 

IFRS 12 – ‘Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities’

• 

IFRS 13 – ‘Fair Value Measurement’

• 

IAS 27 (Revised) – ‘Separate Financial Statements’

• 

IAS 28 (Revised) – ‘Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures’

•  Amendment to IAS 19 – ‘Employee benefi ts’

The adoption of IFRS 9, as currently in issue, would not be anticipated to have a material impact on the accounting of the Group although 

the International Accounting Standards Board (‘IASB’) has announced its intention to expand this Standard in such a way that would require 

changes to the valuation and income recognition methods relating to the Group’s loans to customers, borrowings and derivative assets and 

liabilities. This Standard is currently intended to come into force for the fi nancial year ending 30 September 2016, if the Standard is adopted by 

the European Union. The European Union has declined to consider the endorsement of IFRS 9 until a complete version is issued by the IASB. 

The Group has yet to conduct a full assessment of its potential impact, pending further information on endorsement from the European Union.

56   Notes to the accounts

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

IFRS 10, 11 and 12 and the revised IAS 27 and 28 form the new IFRS regime for consolidation. The directors do not expect that the entities 

included within the consolidated accounts will differ under the new standards from those presently consolidated, nor that the consolidated 

results will be changed, although the disclosures provided under the new standards may differ. These standards, if adopted by the European 

Union, are expected to be applied for the fi rst time in the Group’s accounts for the year ending 30 September 2014.

IFRS 13, which, if adopted by the European Union is expected to apply to the Group’s accounts from the year ending 30 September 2014 

sets out new guidance on the establishment of fair value for accounting purposes and enhanced disclosures. It will apply to all amounts in 

the Group’s fi nancial statements presented at fair value, but is unlikely, in the view of the directors, to have a material impact on the Group’s 

results or fi nancial position.

The revision to IAS 19, which is expected to apply to the Group’s accounts for the year ending 30 September 2014, will change the amounts 

presented in the income statement in respect of the Group’s pension plan, without affecting the surplus or defi cit shown in the balance sheet. 

If that Standard had been in force for the fi nancial year ended 30 September 2012 it is estimated that the effect would be to reduce profi t 

before tax by £0.4m (2011: £0.6m).

Other Standards and interpretations in issue but not effective do not address matters relevant to the Group’s accounting and reporting.

3.  ACCOUNTING POLICIES

The fi nancial statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European 

Union.

The particular policies applied are described below.

(a)  Accounting convention 

The  fi nancial  statements  have  been  prepared  under  the  historical  cost  convention,  except  as  required  in  the  valuation  of  certain  fi nancial 

instruments which are carried at fair value.

(b)  Basis of consolidation 

The consolidated fi nancial statements deal with the accounts of the Company and its subsidiaries made up to 30 September 2012. Subsidiaries 

comprise all those entities over which the Group has control. The results of businesses acquired are dealt with in the consolidated accounts 

from the date of acquisition.

In accordance with SIC 12 – ‘Consolidation: Special Purpose Entities’ companies owned by charitable trusts into which loans originated by 

Mortgage Trust Limited were sold as part of its securitisation programme, where the Group enjoys the benefi ts of ownership, are treated as 

subsidiaries.

Similarly, trusts set up to hold shares in conjunction with the Group’s employee share ownership arrangements are also treated as subsidiaries. 

(c)  Going concern

The consolidated fi nancial statements have been prepared on the going concern basis. The directors’ reasons for the adoption of this basis 

are given in the Corporate Governance Statement on page 44.

Notes to the accounts   57

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

(d)  Goodwill 

Goodwill arising from the purchase of subsidiary undertakings, representing the excess of the fair value of the purchase consideration over 

the fair values of acquired assets, including intangible assets, is held on the balance sheet and reviewed annually to determine whether any 

impairment has occurred.

Negative goodwill is written off as it arises.

As permitted by IFRS 1, the Group has elected not to apply IFRS 3 – ‘Business Combinations’ to combinations taking place before its transition 

date to IFRS (1 October 2004). Therefore any goodwill which was written off to reserves under UK GAAP will not be charged or credited to the 

profi t and loss account on any future disposal of the business to which it relates.

(e) 

Intangible assets 

Intangible assets comprise purchased computer software and other intangible assets acquired in business combinations.

Purchased computer software is capitalised where it has a suffi ciently enduring nature and is stated at cost less accumulated amortisation. 

Amortisation is provided in equal instalments at a rate of 25% per annum.

Other intangible assets acquired in business combinations include brands and business networks and are capitalised in accordance with the 

requirements of IFRS 3 – ‘Business Combinations’. Such assets are stated at attributed cost less accumulated amortisation. Amortisation is 

provided in equal instalments at a rate of 6.67% per annum.

(f) 

Leases 

Leases are accounted for as operating or fi nance leases in accordance with IAS 17 – ‘Leases’. A fi nance lease is deemed to be one which 

transfers substantially all of the risks and rewards of the ownership of the asset concerned. Any other lease is an operating lease.

Rental income and costs under operating leases are credited or charged to the profi t and loss account on a straight line basis over the period 

of the leases.

(g)  Contract hire

Motor  vehicles  acquired  in  connection  with  contract  hire  arrangements  are  sold  to  fi nance  houses,  who  lease  them  to  customers  for  a 
pre-determined period. The Group has undertaken to repurchase these vehicles at the end of the lease term.

In accordance with the requirements of IAS 17, the assets are not derecognised on the sale to the fi nance house and remain as the Group’s 

assets and the consideration received is spread over the customer’s lease term.

58   Notes to the accounts

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

(h)  Property, plant and equipment 

Property, plant and equipment is stated at cost less accumulated depreciation. Cost for property held under a sale and leaseback transaction 

represents the sale value. 

Depreciation is provided on cost in equal annual instalments over the lives of the assets. Land is not depreciated. The rates of depreciation 

are as follows:

Freehold premises 

  2% per annum

Short leasehold premises 

  over the term of the lease

Computer hardware 

  25% per annum

Furniture, fi xtures and offi ce equipment 

  15% per annum

Company motor vehicles 

  25% per annum

Motor vehicles subject to contract hire arrangements 

  over the term of the lease

(i) 

Investments in subsidiaries

The Company’s investments in subsidiary undertakings are valued at cost less provision for impairment. 

(j) 

Loans to customers 

Loans to customers are considered to be ‘loans and receivables’ as defi ned by IAS 39 – ‘Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement’. 

They are therefore accounted for on the amortised cost basis.

Loans advanced are valued at inception at the initial advance amount, which is the fair value at that time, inclusive of procuration fees paid 

to brokers or other business providers and less initial fees paid by the customer. Loans acquired from third parties are initially valued at the 

purchase consideration paid or payable. Thereafter, all loans to customers are valued at this initial amount less the cumulative amortisation 

calculated using the Effective Interest Rate (‘EIR’) method. The loan balances are then reduced where necessary by a provision for balances 

which are considered to be impaired.

The EIR method spreads the expected net income arising from a loan over its expected life. The EIR is that rate of interest which, at inception, 

exactly discounts the future cash payments and receipts arising from the loan to the initial carrying amount. 

The Group’s policy is to hedge against any exposure to fi xed rate loan assets.

(k)  Finance lease receivables

Finance lease receivables are included within ‘Loans to Customers’ at the total amount receivable less interest not yet accrued, unamortised 

commissions and provision for doubtful debts.

Income from fi nance lease contracts is accounted for on the actuarial basis.

(l) 

Impairment of loans and receivables

Loans and receivables are reviewed for indications of possible impairment throughout the year and at each balance sheet date, in accordance 

with IAS 39. Where loans exhibit objective evidence of impairment, the carrying value of the loans is reduced to the net present value of their 

expected future cash fl ows, including the value of the potential realisation of any security, discounted at the original EIR. Loans are assessed 

collectively, grouped by risk characteristics and account is taken of any impairment arising due to events which are believed to have taken 

place but have not been specifi cally identifi ed at the balance sheet date. 

Notes to the accounts   59

 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

For fi nancial accounting purposes provisions for impairments of loans to customers are held in an allowance account. These balances are 

offset against the gross value of the loan when it is written off on the administration system. After this point a salvage balance may be held in 

respect of any further recoveries expected on the loan.

(m) 

Investments in structured entities

Investments in structured entities are intended to be held to maturity and are therefore accounted for on the amortised cost basis. The return 

from such investments is calculated on the EIR basis.

(n)  Amounts owed by or to group companies

In  the  accounts  of  the  Company  balances  owed  by  or  to  other  group  companies  are  carried  at  the  current  amount  outstanding  less  any 

provision. Where balances owing between group companies fall within the defi nition of either fi nancial assets or fi nancial liabilities given in IAS 

32 – ‘Financial Instruments: Presentation’ they are classifi ed as ‘Loans and Receivables’ or ‘Other fi nancial liabilities’, respectively.

(o)  Cash and cash equivalents 

Balances shown as cash and cash equivalents in the balance sheet comprise demand deposits and short-term deposits with banks with initial 

maturities of not more than 90 days. 

(p)  Own shares 

Shares in The Paragon Group of Companies PLC held in treasury or by the trustees of the Group’s employee share ownership plans are shown 

on the balance sheet as a deduction in arriving at total equity. Own shares are stated at cost.

(q)  Taxation

The  charge  for  taxation  is  based  on  the  profi t  for  the  period  and  takes  into  account  taxation  deferred  because  of  temporary  differences. 

Temporary differences arise from the inclusion of items of income and expenditure in taxation computations in periods different from those in 

which they are included in fi nancial statements.

Tax relating to items taken directly to equity is also taken directly to equity.

(r)  Borrowings 

Borrowings are carried in the balance sheet on the amortised cost basis. The initial value recognised includes the principal amount received 

less any discount on issue or costs of issuance.

Interest and all other costs of the funding are expensed to the income statement as interest payable over the term of the borrowing on an 

Effective Interest Rate basis.

Gains on the purchase of the Group’s Floating Rate Notes or corporate bonds are recognised as income at the time of the transaction.

(s)  Finance lease payables

Balances due on the lease arising from the sale and leaseback of a Group property are recognised in creditors at the total amount payable less 

interest not yet accrued. Interest is accrued on the actuarial basis.

The profi t which arose on the sale and leaseback transaction is held within deferred income and is being credited to profi t over the lease term 

on a straight line basis.

60   Notes to the accounts

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

(t)  Derivative fi nancial instruments 

Derivative  instruments  utilised  by  the  Group  comprise  currency  swap,  interest  rate  swap  and  interest  rate  option  agreements.  All  such 

instruments are used for hedging purposes to alter the risk profi le of the existing underlying exposure of the Group in line with the Group’s risk 

management policies. 

The Group does not enter into speculative derivative contracts.

All derivatives are carried in the balance sheet at fair value, as assets where the value is positive or as liabilities where the value is negative. 

Fair value is based on market prices, where a market exists. If there is no active market, fair value is calculated using present value models 

which incorporate assumptions based on market conditions and are consistent with accepted economic methodologies for pricing fi nancial 

instruments. Changes in the fair value of derivatives are recognised in the income statement, except where such amounts are permitted to be 

taken to equity as part of the accounting for a cash fl ow hedge. 

(u)  Hedging

For all hedges, the Group documents, at inception, the relationship between the hedging instruments and the hedged items, as well as its risk 

management strategy and objectives for undertaking the transaction. The Group also documents its assessment, both at hedge inception and 

on an ongoing basis, of whether the hedging arrangements put in place are considered to be ‘highly effective’ as defi ned by IAS 39. 

For a fair value hedge, as long as the hedging relationship is deemed ‘highly effective’ and meets the hedging requirements of IAS 39, any gain 

or loss on the hedging instrument recognised in income can be offset against the fair value loss or gain arising from the hedged item for the 

hedged risk. For macro hedges (hedges of interest rate risk for a portfolio of loan assets) this fair value adjustment is disclosed in the balance 

sheet alongside the hedged item, for other hedges the adjustment is made to the carrying value of the hedged asset or liability. Only the net 

ineffectiveness of the hedge is charged or credited to income. Where a fair value hedge relationship is terminated, or deemed ineffective, the 

fair value adjustment is amortised over the remaining term of the underlying item.

Where a derivative is used to hedge the variability of cash fl ows of an asset or liability, it may be designated as a cash fl ow hedge so long 

as this relationship meets the hedging requirements of IAS 39. For such an instrument the effective portion of the change in the fair value of 

the derivative is taken initially to equity, with the ineffective part taken to profi t or loss. The amount taken to equity is released to the income 

statement at the same time as the hedged item affects the income statement. Where a cash fl ow hedge relationship is terminated, or deemed 

ineffective, the amount taken to equity will remain there until the hedged transaction is recognised, or is no longer highly probable.

(v)  Deferred taxation 

Deferred taxation is provided in full on temporary differences that result in an obligation at the balance sheet date to pay more tax, or a right 

to pay less tax, at a future date, at rates expected to apply when they crystallise based on current tax rates and law. Deferred tax assets are 

recognised to the extent that it is regarded as probable that they will be recovered. As required by IAS 12 – ‘Income Taxes’, deferred tax assets 

and liabilities are not discounted to take account of the expected timing of realisation. 

(w)  Retirement benefi t obligations 

The expected cost of providing pensions within the funded defi ned benefi t scheme, determined on the basis of annual valuations by professionally 

qualifi ed actuaries using the projected unit method, is charged to the income statement. Actuarial gains and losses are recognised in full in 

the period in which they occur and do not form part of the result for the period, being recognised in the Statement of Comprehensive Income.

The retirement benefi t obligation recognised in the balance sheet represents the present value of the defi ned benefi t obligation, as adjusted for 

unrecognised past service cost, and as reduced by the fair value of scheme assets at the balance sheet date. 

Both the return on investment expected in the period and the expected fi nancing cost of the liability, as estimated at the beginning of the period 

are recognised in the result for the period. Any variances against these estimates in the year form part of the actuarial gain or loss.

The assets of the scheme are held separately from those of the Group in an independently administered fund.

The charge to the income statement for providing pensions under defi ned contribution pension schemes is equal to the contributions payable 

to such schemes for the year.

Notes to the accounts   61

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

(x)  Provisions

Provisions are recognised where there is a present obligation as a result of a past event, it is probable that this obligation will result in an outfl ow 

of resources and this outfl ow can be reliably quantifi ed. Provisions are discounted where this effect is material. 

(y)  Revenue

The revenue of the Group comprises interest receivable and similar charges and other income. The accounting policy for the recognition of 

each element of revenue is described separately within these accounting policies. 

(z)  Fee and commission income

Other income includes administration fees charged to borrowers, which are credited when the related service is performed, fees charged to 

third parties for account administration services, which are credited as those services are performed, and commissions receivable on the sale 

of insurances, which are taken to profi t at the point at which the Group becomes unconditionally entitled to the income.

(aa)  Share based payments

In accordance with IFRS 2 – ‘Share based payments’, the fair value at the date of grant of awards to be made in respect of options and shares 

granted under the terms of the Group’s various share based employee incentive arrangements is charged to the profi t and loss account over 

the period between the date of grant and the vesting date.

As permitted by IFRS 1, only those options and awards granted after 7 November 2002 and not vested at 1 January 2005 have been restated 

on transition to IFRS.

National Insurance on share based payments is accrued over the vesting period, based on the share price at the balance sheet date.

Where the allowable cost of share based awards for tax purposes is greater than the cost determined in accordance with IFRS 2, the tax effect 

of the excess is taken to reserves. 

(bb)  Dividends

In accordance with IAS 10 – ‘Events after the balance sheet date’, dividends payable on ordinary shares are recognised in equity once they 
are appropriately authorised and are no longer at the discretion of the Company. Dividends declared after the balance sheet date, but before 

the authorisation of the fi nancial statements remain within shareholders’ funds. 

(cc)  Foreign currency

Foreign  currency  transactions,  assets  and  liabilities  are  accounted  for  in  accordance  with  IAS  21  –  ‘The  Effects  of  Changes  in  Foreign 

Exchange Rates’. The functional currency of the Group is the pound sterling. Transactions which are not denominated in sterling are translated 

into sterling at the spot rate of exchange on the date of transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities which are not denominated in sterling are 

translated at the closing rate on the balance sheet date.

Gains and losses on retranslation are included in interest payable or interest receivable depending on whether the underlying instrument is an 

asset or a liability, except where deferred in equity in accordance with the cash fl ow hedging provisions of IAS 39.

(dd)  Segmental reporting

The accounting policies of the operating segments are the same as those described above for the Group as a whole. Costs attributed to 

each segment represent the direct costs incurred by the segment operations and an allocation of the costs of areas of the business which 

serve all segments. Such allocations are weighted by the value of loan assets in each segment, adjusted for the relative effort involved in the 

administration of each asset class.

62   Notes to the accounts

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

4.  CRITICAL ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES

Certain of the balances reported in the fi nancial statements are based wholly or in part on estimates or assumptions made by the directors. 

There is, therefore, a potential risk that they may be subject to change in future periods. The most signifi cant of these are:

(a) 

Impairment losses on loans to customers

Impairment losses on loans are calculated based on statistical models. The key assumptions revolve around estimates of future cash fl ows 

from customers’ accounts, their timing and, for secured accounts, the expected proceeds from the realisation of the property. These key 

assumptions are based on observed data from historical patterns and are updated regularly based on new data as it becomes available. 

In  addition  the  directors  consider  how  appropriate  past  trends  and  patterns  might  be  in  the  current  economic  situation  and  make  any 

adjustments they believe are necessary to refl ect the current conditions. 

The accuracy of the impairment calculations would therefore be affected by unexpected changes to the economic situation, variances between 

the models used and the actual results, or assumptions which differ from the actual outcomes. In particular, if the impact of economic factors 

such as employment levels on customers is worse than is implicit in the model then the number of accounts requiring provision might be 

greater than suggested by the model, while falls in house prices, over and above any assumed by the model might increase the provision 

required in respect of accounts currently provided.

(b)  Effective interest rates

In order to determine the effective interest rate applicable to loans an estimate must be made of the expected life of each loan and hence 

the cash fl ows relating thereto. For purchased accounts this will involve estimating the likely future performance of the accounts at the time 

of acquisition. These estimates are based on historical data and reviewed regularly. For purchased accounts historical data obtained from 

the vendor will be examined. The accuracy of the effective interest rate applied would therefore be compromised by any differences between 

actual borrower behaviour and that predicted.

(c)  Fair values

Where fi nancial assets and liabilities are carried at fair value, in the majority of cases this can be derived by reference to quoted market prices. 

Where such a quoted price is not available the valuation is based on cash fl ow models based, where possible, on independently sourced 

parameters. The accuracy of the calculation would therefore be affected by unexpected market movements or other variances in the operation 

of the models or the assumptions used.

(d)  Retirement benefi ts

The present value of the retirement benefi t obligation is derived from an actuarial calculation which rests on a number of assumptions. These 

are listed in note 50. Where actual conditions differ from those assumed the ultimate value of the obligation would be different.

(e)  Goodwill and intangible assets arising on acquisition 

The value of goodwill and intangible assets recognised on the Group’s acquisition of TBMC was derived from the projected cash fl ows for that 

business at the time of acquisition, based on management forecasts. The accuracy of this valuation would therefore be compromised by any 

differences between these forecasts and the levels of business activity that the entity might actually have been able to generate in the absence 

of the acquisition. This valuation will also be affected by the accuracy of the discount factor used.

The carrying value of the goodwill and intangible assets is dependent on the accuracy of the inputs into the impairment test described in     

note 24. 

Notes to the accounts   63

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

5. 

CAPITAL MANAGEMENT

The Group’s objectives in managing capital are:

•  To ensure that the Group has suffi cient capital to meet its operational requirements and strategic objectives;

• 

 To safeguard the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern, so that it can continue to provide returns to shareholders and benefi ts for 

other stakeholders; and

•  To provide an adequate return to shareholders by pricing products and services commensurately with the level of risk.

The  Group  sets  the  amount  of  capital  in  proportion  to  risk,  availability  and  cost.  The  Group  manages  the  capital  structure  and  makes 

adjustments to it in the light of changes in economic conditions and the risk characteristics of the underlying assets, having particular regard 

to the relative costs and availability of debt and equity fi nance at any given time. In order to maintain or adjust the capital structure the Group 

may adjust the amount of dividends paid to shareholders, return capital to shareholders, issue new shares, issue or redeem other capital 

instruments, such as corporate bonds, or sell assets to reduce debt. The Group is not subject to any externally imposed capital requirements.

Since its rights issue in 2008 the Group has pursued a progressive dividend policy with the dividend being increased from 3.0p in respect of 

that year to 4.0p in respect of the year ended 30 September 2011. As a result of the progress of the business since that date the directors 

have now adopted a new policy under which the dividends will increase so that, by the year ending 30 September 2016, the level of dividend 

cover will be maintained in the range 3.0 to 3.5 times.

The level of dividend cover in respect of the year, subject to the approval of the fi nal dividend at the Annual General Meeting is shown below.

Profi t after tax for the year (£m) 

Proposed dividend in respect of the year (£m) 

Dividend cover (times) 

Note 

44 

2012 

72.2 
17.8 

4.1 

2011

59.6

11.9

5.0

Return on equity is defi ned by the Group by comparing the profi t after tax for the year to the average of the opening and closing equity positions 

and is derived as follows:

2012 
£m 

72.2 

742.0 
803.5 

772.7 

9.3% 

2011

£m

59.6

692.0

742.0

717.0

8.3%

Profi t for the year 

Divided by  

Opening equity 

Closing equity  

Average equity 

Return on equity 

64   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

The Board of Directors regularly review the proportion of working capital represented by debt and equity. Net debt is calculated as total debt, 

other  than  securitised  and  warehouse  debt,  valued  at  principal  value,  less  free  cash  up  to  a  maximum  of  the  total  debt.  Adjusted  equity 

comprises all components of equity (i.e. share capital, share premium, minority interest, retained earnings, and revaluation surplus) other than 

amounts recognised in equity relating to cash fl ow hedges. 

The debt and equity amounts at 30 September 2012 and at 30 September 2011 were as follows:

Debt 
Corporate bond 

Bank overdraft 

Less: Applicable free cash 

Net debt     

Equity   
Total equity 

Less: cash fl ow hedging reserve   

Adjusted equity 

Total working capital 

Debt 

Equity 

Total working capital 

2012 
£m 

110.0 
0.6 
(110.6) 

- 

803.5 
(0.7) 

802.8 

802.8 

- 
100.0% 

2011

£m

110.0

0.6

(110.6)

-

742.0

(1.8)

740.2

740.2

-

100.0%

100.0% 

100.0%

In addition the Group held £17.1m of free cash in excess of that shown above (2011: £84.4m).

The stable proportion of working capital represented by equity during 2012 resulted primarily from the operation of the policy described above. 

6.  FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT

The principal fi nancial risks arising from the Group’s normal business activities are credit risk, liquidity risk, interest rate risk and currency risk. 

The Board operates through the Credit Committee and the Asset and Liability Committee to review and agree policies for managing each of 

these risks, as described in the Corporate Governance Statement on pages 40 to 44, and they are summarised below. These policies have 

remained unchanged throughout the year and since the year end. The position disclosed below is materially similar to that existing throughout 

the year.

Use of derivative fi nancial instruments

The Group uses derivative fi nancial instruments for risk management purposes. Such instruments are used only to limit the exposure of the 

Group to movements in market interest or exchange rates.

It is, and has been throughout the year under review, the Group’s policy that no trading in fi nancial instruments shall be undertaken, and 

hence all of the Group’s derivative fi nancial instruments are for commercial hedging purposes only. These are used to protect the Group from 

exposures principally arising from fi xed rate lending or borrowing and borrowings denominated in foreign currencies. Hedge accounting is 

applied where appropriate, though it should be noted that some derivatives, while forming part of an economic hedge relationship, do not 

qualify for this accounting treatment under the IAS 39 rules, while in other cases hedge accounting has not been adopted either because 

natural accounting offsets are expected or because complying with the IAS 39 hedge accounting rules would be especially onerous.

Notes to the accounts   65

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

The Group has designated a number of derivatives as fair value hedges for accounting purposes. In particular this treatment is used for:

(a)   hedging the interest rate risk of groups of fi xed rate pre-payable loan assets with interest rate derivatives on a portfolio basis. The Group 

believes this solution is the most appropriate as it is consistent with the economic hedging approach taken by the Group to these assets.

(b)   hedging the interest rate risk of fi xed rate corporate bond borrowings with a designated fi xed to fl oating interest rate swap, which was 

taken out for this specifi c purpose.

The  Group  has  also  designated  cash  fl ow  hedging  relationships,  principally  arising  from  currency  borrowings,  where  a  specifi ed  foreign 

exchange basis swap, set up as part of the terms of the borrowing is used.

The only derivative fi nancial instrument held by the Company at 30 September 2011 was the swap related to the fi xed rate corporate bond 

borrowing described above. This reached its term in the year and the Company now has no derivative assets or liabilities.

Credit risk

The Group’s business objectives rely on maintaining a high-quality customer base and place strong emphasis on good credit management, 

both at the time of acquiring or underwriting a new loan, where strict lending criteria are applied, and in the collections process.

Primary  responsibility  for  credit  risk  management  across  the  Group  lies  with  the  Credit  Committee.  The  Credit  Committee  is  made  up  of 

four senior members of staff, headed by the Finance Director. Its key responsibilities include setting and reviewing credit policy, controlling 

applicant quality, tracking account performance against targets, agreeing product criteria and lending guidelines and monitoring performance 

and trends.

The assets of the Group and the Company which are subject to credit risk are set out below:

  The Group 

The Company

Loans to customers 

Investments in securities 

Derivative fi nancial assets 

Amounts owed by Group companies 

Accrued interest 

Cash 

Note 

31 

34 

35 

36 

36 

37 

2012 

£m 

8,694.6 
9.1 
800.4 
- 
0.2 
504.8 

2011 

£m 

8,724.2 

11.8 

1,151.8 

- 

0.5 

571.6 

Maximum exposure to credit risk 

10,009.1 

10,459.9 

The Group’s credit risk is primarily attributable to its loans to customers.

2012 
£m 

- 
- 
- 
80.1 
- 
124.5 

204.6 

2011

£m

-

-

4.0

79.9

0.1

189.2

273.2

While this maximum exposure represents the potential loss which might have to be accounted for by the Group, the terms on which the 

Group’s loan assets are funded, described under Liquidity Risk below, limit the amount of principal repayments on the Group’s securitised and 

warehouse borrowings in cases of capital losses on assets, signifi cantly reducing the effective shareholder value at risk.

66   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

The Group’s loan assets at 30 September 2012 are analysed as follows:

Buy-to-let mortgages 

Owner occupied mortgages 

Total fi rst mortgages 

Secured loans  

Loans secured on property 
Car loans    

Retail fi nance loans 

Other loans 

Total loans to customers 

2012 

£m 

8,196.4 
99.2 

8,295.6 

279.9 

8,575.5 

2.5 

2.0 

114.6 

8,694.6 

2012 
% 

94.3% 
1.1% 

95.4% 
3.2% 

98.6% 
0.1% 
- 
1.3% 

2011 

£m 

8,231.7 

128.7 

8,360.4 

340.1 

8,700.5 

7.5 

2.9 

13.3 

2011

%

94.3%

1.5%

95.8%

3.9%

99.7%

0.1%

-

0.2%

100.0% 

8,724.2 

100.0%

Other loans include unsecured loans either advanced by Group companies or acquired from their originators at a discount. 

There are no signifi cant concentrations of credit risk due to the large number of customers included in the portfolios.

The Group’s underwriting philosophy is based on a combination of sophisticated individual credit assessment and the automated effi ciencies 

of a scored decision making process. Information on each applicant is combined with data taken from a credit reference bureau to provide a 

complete credit picture of the applicant and the borrowing requested. Key information is validated through a combination of documentation 

and  statistical  data  which  collectively  provides  evidence  of  the  applicant’s  ability  and  willingness  to  pay  the  amount  contracted  under  the      

loan agreement.

First mortgages and secured loans are secured by charges over residential properties in England and Wales, or similar Scottish or Northern 

Irish securities. Car loans are effectively secured by the fi nanced vehicle.

Despite this security, in assessing credit risk, an applicant’s ability and propensity to repay the loan remain the principal factors in the decision 

to lend.

In considering whether to acquire pools of loan assets or invest in loan portfolios, the Group will undertake a due diligence exercise on the 

underlying loan accounts. Such assets are generally not fully performing and are offered at a discount to their current balance. The Group’s 

procedures may include inspection of original loan documents, verifi cation of security and the examination of the credit status of borrowers. 
Current and historic cash fl ow data will also be examined. The objective of the exercise is to establish, to a level of confi dence similar to that 

provided by the underwriting process, that the assets will generate suffi cient cash fl ows to recover the Group’s investment and generate an 

appropriate return. 

Investments  in  structured  entities  represent  the  Group’s  contribution  made  to  special  purpose  vehicle  (‘SPV’)  companies  established  and 

controlled by third parties to purchase pools of loan assets. All such investments are denominated in sterling and the underlying loans are made 

to United Kingdom borrowers. Cash generated by the assets is distributed to investors in accordance with a specifi ed priority of payments. 

The Group has no obligation to make further contributions to the SPV companies concerned.

The management has considered the position of the underlying assets and concluded that they will generate suffi cient cash fl ows to repay 

the amount of the investment.

In order to control credit risk relating to counterparties to the Group’s derivative fi nancial instruments and cash deposits, the Asset and Liability 
Committee determines which counterparties the Group will deal with, establishes limits for each counterparty and monitors compliance with 

those limits. Such counterparties are typically highly rated banks and, for all cash deposits and derivative positions held within the Group’s 

securitisation structures, must comply with criteria set out in the fi nancing arrangements. Where a derivative counterparty fails to meet the 

required criteria they are obliged under the terms of the instruments to set aside a cash collateral deposit. The amounts of these cash collateral 

deposits, which do not form part of the Group’s cash position, are given in note 35.

Notes to the accounts   67

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

The Group’s cash balances are held in sterling at London banks in current accounts and as short fi xed term deposits. Credit risk on these 

balances, and the interest accrued thereon, is considered to be immaterial. An analysis of the indexed loan to value ratio (‘LTV’) for those loan 

accounts secured on property by value at 30 September 2012 is set out below. For acquired accounts the effect of any discount on purchase 

is allowed for.

Loan to value ratio 
Less than 70% 

70% to 80% 

80% to 90% 

90% to 100%  

Over 100% 

Average loan to value ratio 

2012 
  First mortgages 
% 

2012 
Secured loans 
% 

23.7 

22.1 

26.4 

21.7 

6.1 

100.0 

81.1 

26.2 
14.4 
14.0 
14.2 
31.2 

100.0 

90.9 

2011 

2011

First mortgages 

Secured loans

% 

23.2 

21.6 

29.7 

21.0 

4.5 

100.0 

80.2 

%

28.2

14.8

15.0

13.9

28.1

100.0

88.4

The regionally indexed LTVs shown above are affected by changes in house prices, with the Nationwide house price index, for the UK as a 

whole, registering an annual reduction of 1.6% in the year ended 30 September 2012.

The number of accounts in arrears by asset class, based on the most commonly quoted defi nition of arrears for the type of asset, at 30 

September 2012 and 30 September 2011, compared to the industry averages at those dates published by the Council of Mortgage Lenders 

(‘CML’) and the Finance and Leasing Association (‘FLA’), was:

First mortgages 
Accounts more than three months in arrears 

 Buy-to-Let accounts including receiver of rent cases 

 Buy-to-Let accounts excluding receiver of rent cases 

 Owner Occupied accounts    

CML data for mortgage accounts more than three months in arrears 

 Buy-to-Let accounts including receiver of rent cases 

 Buy-to-Let accounts excluding receiver of rent cases 

 Owner-Occupied accounts    

 All mortgages 

 Secured loans 
Accounts more than 2 months in arrears 

FLA data for secured loans  

Car loans  
Accounts more than 2 months in arrears 

FLA data for all personal loans  

 Other loans   
Accounts more than 2 months in arrears 

2012 
% 

0.48 
0.06 
4.38 

1.51 
1.22 
2.03 
1.93 

19.42 
18.00 

18.45 
7.20 

2011

%

0.63

0.10

4.24

1.90

1.44

2.15

2.06

18.48

18.40

8.11

9.30

62.92 

75.09

No  published  industry  data  for  asset  classes  comparable  to  the  Group’s  other  books  has  been  identifi ed.  Where  revised  data  at                                       

30 September 2011 has been published by the FLA or CML, the comparative industry fi gures above have been amended. 

68   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

The number of accounts in arrears will be higher for closed books such as the owner-occupied mortgage book and the car fi nance, retail 

fi nance and unsecured loan books than for comparable active ones, as performing accounts pay off their balances, leaving arrears accounts 

representing a greater proportion of the total.

The fi gures shown above for secured loans and other loans include purchased portfolios which generally include a high proportion of cases 

in arrears at the time of purchase and where this level of performance is allowed for in the discount to current balance represented by the 

purchase price.

The  payment  status  of  the  carrying  balances  of  the  Group’s  loan  assets,  before  provision  for  impairment,  at  30  September  2012  and  at          

30 September 2011 split between those accounts considered as performing and those included in the population for impairment testing, is 

shown below. 

First Mortgages

Not past due   

Arrears less than 3 months 

Performing accounts 

Arrears 3 to 6 months 

Arrears 6 to 12 months 

Arrears over 12 months 

Possessions and similar cases 

Impairment population 

2012 
£m 

7,949.4 
270.3 

8,219.7 

6.5 
9.2 
36.0 
49.8 

2011

£m

7,941.5

325.7

8,267.2

11.5

17.2

43.6

43.4

101.5 

115.7

8,321.2 

8,382.9

Notes to the accounts   69

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Consumer Finance

30 September 2012 
Not past due   
Arrears less than 2 months 

Performing accounts 

Arrears 2 to 6 months 
Arrears 6 to 9 months 
Arrears 9 to 12 months 
Arrears over 12 months 

Impairment population 

30 September 2011 
Not past due   

Arrears less than 2 months 

Performing accounts 

Arrears 2 to 6 months 

Arrears 6 to 9 months 

Arrears 9 to 12 months 

Arrears over 12 months 

Impairment population 

Other loans

Not past due   

Arrears less than 1 month 

Performing accounts 

Arrears 1 to 3 months 

Arrears 3 to 6 months 

Arrears 6 to 12 months 

Arrears over 12 months 

Impairment population 

70   Notes to the accounts

Secured loans 

Car loans 

Retail fi nance 

£m 

208.4 

30.2 

238.6 

19.5 

8.2 

5.9 

23.7 

57.3 

295.9 

252.7 

33.6 

286.3 

25.6 

8.7 

6.3 

20.9 

61.5 

347.8 

£m 

1.5 

0.4 

1.9 

0.1 

0.1 

- 

0.6 

0.8 

2.7 

5.6 

0.8 

6.4 

0.2 

0.1 

- 

0.7 

1.0 

7.4 

loans 

£m 

0.3 

- 

0.3 

- 

0.1 

0.1 

2.2 

2.4 

2.7 

0.9 

- 

0.9 

0.1 

0.1 

0.1 

2.7 

3.0 

3.9 

2012 
£m 

32.1 
1.8 

33.9 

1.4 
1.6 
2.1 
87.5 

92.6 

126.5 

Total

£m

210.2

30.6

240.8

19.6

8.4

6.0

26.5

60.5

301.3

259.2

34.4

293.6

25.9

8.9

6.4

24.3

65.5

359.1

2011

£m

3.3

0.1

3.4

0.1

0.3

1.0

41.9

43.3

46.7

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Liquidity risk

The Group uses securitisation to mitigate its exposure to liquidity risk, ensuring, as far as possible, that the maturities of assets and liabilities 

are matched. 

The Group’s originated loan assets are principally fi nanced by asset backed loan notes (‘Notes’) issued through the securitisation process. 

In a securitisation deal an SPV company within the Group will issue Notes secured on a pool of mortgage or other loan assets owned by the 

SPV. The Notes have a maturity date later than the fi nal repayment date for any asset in the pool, typically over 30 years from the issue date. 

The noteholders are entitled to receive repayment of the Note principal out of principal funds generated by the loan assets from time to time, 

but their right to the repayment of principal is limited to the cash available in the SPV. Similarly, payment of accrued interest to the noteholders 

is limited to cash generated within the SPV. There is no requirement for any Group company other than the issuing SPV to make principal 

or interest payments in respect of the Notes. This matching of the maturities of the assets and the related funding substantially reduces the 

Group’s exposure to liquidity risk. Details of Notes in issue are given in note 48 and the assets backing the Notes are shown in notes 29 and 30. 

In the Group’s consumer fi nance SPVs, principal cash was not required to be repaid to noteholders during an initial period, but instead could 

be used to acquire new loans from the Group, subject to underwriting conditions being met. Following the completion of this initial period, 

principal cash is repaid in the same way as for other SPVs.

The  Group  also  provides  funding  to  the  SPV  at  inception,  subordinated  to  the  Notes,  which  means  that  credit  risk  on  the  pool  assets  is 

retained within the Group. The Group receives the residual income generated by the assets. These factors mean that the risks and rewards of 

ownership of the assets remain with the Group, and hence the loans remain on the Group’s balance sheet.

Cash received in each SPV is held until the next interest payment date, after which the remaining balances become available to the Group. 

Cash  balances  are  also  held  within  each  SPV  to  provide  credit  enhancement  for  the  particular  securitisation,  allowing  principal  payments 

to be made even if loans default. In order to provide further credit enhancement in certain of the SPVs there exist specifi c economic trigger 

events which cause additional cash to be retained in the SPV, rather than being transferred to the Group. While the Group can, if it chooses, 

contribute additional cash to cover these requirements, it is under no obligation to do so. No such trigger event has occurred to date in any of 

the Group’s SPVs and whether one arises in the future will depend on the performance of the general economy and its impact on mortgage 

and loan arrears. However if such trigger events occurred in all of the SPVs, a total of £67.9m of additional cash would be retained in those 

companies (2011: £66.0m). The cash balances of the SPV companies are included within the restricted cash balances disclosed in note 37.

Newly originated mortgage loans are initially funded by a revolving loan facility or ‘warehouse’ from the point of their origination until their 

inclusion in a securitisation deal. A warehouse functions in a similar way to an SPV, except that funds are drawn down as advances are made 

and repaid when loans are securitised.

On 29 February 2008 the warehouse facility provided to Paragon Second Funding Limited ceased to be available for new drawings, although 

assets held within it at that time continued to be funded. Repayment of the principal on these assets is not required unless amounts are 
realised from them. The fi nal repayment date of the facility is later than the fi nal due date of the assets it is used to fund. 

On  27  September  2010  Macquarie  Bank  and  Paragon  Fourth  Funding  Limited  signed  a  new  warehouse  facility  agreement,  which  was 

renewed on substantially the same terms following the end of the fi nancial year. This warehouse is available for drawing and redrawing until 

13 December 2014 and is used to fund new fi rst charge mortgage loans. After that date the loan has a further two year period for the assets 

funded to be sold or refi nanced. Repayment of the principal drawn in respect of assets is not required unless amounts are realised from them 

either through repayment, securitisation or asset sales, even after the two year period. There is no further recourse to other assets of the Group 

in respect of either interest or principal on the borrowing.

On  27  September  2012  the  wholesale  division  of  Lloyds  Bank  and  Paragon  Fifth  Funding  Limited  signed  an  additional  warehouse  facility 

agreement, which was undrawn at 30 September 2012 but which will operate in parallel with the existing Paragon Fourth Funding facility. The 

term of the facility is three years and it will be available to fund new loans in its fi rst 18 months, or up to 24 months if a securitisation of funded 

assets is achieved in the fi rst year. As with the Paragon Fourth Funding facility repayment of the principal drawn in respect of assets is not 

required unless amounts are realised from them either through repayment, securitisation or asset sales, even after the initial period. There is 

no further recourse to other assets of the Group in respect of either interest or principal on the borrowing 

As with the SPVs, the Group provides subordinated funding to the warehouse companies and restricted cash balances are held within them. 

Further details of the warehouse facilities are given in note 48 and details of the loan assets within the warehouses are given in note 29.

Notes to the accounts   71

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Between 29 February 2008 and 4 October 2010 the only advances made by the Group were consumer loans and further advances on existing 

mortgage accounts, which were funded from existing drawings in the SPV companies. The provision of new consumer loans ceased on 9 April 

2009, except for further advances on existing accounts, when the period over which new loans could be sold to the consumer fi nance SPVs 

ended. New fi rst mortgage lending commenced on 5 October 2010.

The securitisation process and the terms of the warehouse facilities effectively limit liquidity risk from the funding of the Group’s loan assets. It 

remains to ensure that suffi cient funding is available to fund the Group’s participation in the SPVs, provide capital support for new loans and 

working capital for the Group. This responsibility rests with the Asset and Liability Committee which sets the Group’s liquidity policy and uses 

detailed cash fl ow projections to ensure that an adequate level of liquidity is available at all times.

The fi nal repayment date for all of the securitisation borrowings and the old warehouse borrowing is more than fi ve years from the balance 

sheet date, the earliest falling due in 2033 and the latest in 2050. 

The equivalent sterling principal amount outstanding at 30 September 2012 under the SPV and warehouse arrangements, allowing for the 

effect of the cross currency basis swaps, described under currency risk below, which are net settled with the loan payments, was £8,240.6m 

(2011: £8,404.4m). The total sterling amount payable under these arrangements, were these principal amounts to remain outstanding until 

the fi nal repayment date would be £16,429.1m (2011: £17,947.4m). As the principal will, as discussed above, reduce as customers repay or 

redeem their accounts, the cash fl ow will in practice be far less than this amount. 

The Group’s investments in purchased loan portfolios and structured entities are funded from its free cash balances and these investments 

carry no obligation to make further payments. They therefore pose no liquidity risk to the Group.

The total undiscounted amounts, inclusive of estimated interest, which would be payable in respect of the Group’s other borrowings, should 

those balances remain outstanding until the contracted repayment date, together with amounts payable in respect of the ‘other accruals’ 

shown in note 53 are shown below.

30 September 2012 
Payable in less than one year 

Payable in one to two years 

Payable in two to fi ve years 

Payable in over fi ve years 

30 September 2011 
Payable in less than one year 

Payable in one to two years 

Payable in two to fi ve years 

Payable in over fi ve years 

Corporate bond 

Other accruals 

£m 

£m 

4.1 

4.1 

122.3 

- 

130.5 

7.7 

7.8 

23.1 

117.7 

156.3 

11.8 

- 

- 

- 

11.8 

11.7 

0.1 

- 

- 

11.8 

Total

£m

15.9

4.1

122.3

-

142.3

19.4

7.9

23.1

117.7

168.1

The cash fl ows described above will include those for interest on borrowings accrued at 30 September 2012 disclosed in note 53.

72   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
The cash fl ows which are expected to arise from derivative contracts in place at the year end, estimating future fl oating rate payments and 

receipts on the basis of the yield curve at the balance sheet date are as follows:

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

On derivative liabilities 
Payable in less than one year 

Payable in one to two years 

Payable in two to fi ve years 

Payable in over fi ve years 

On derivative assets 
Payable in less than one year 

Payable in one to two years 

Payable in two to fi ve years 

Payable in over fi ve years 

Interest rate risk

2012 
Total cash 
  outfl ow / (infl ow) 
£m 

1.6 
0.4 
0.8 
2.8 

5.6 

(0.4) 
(0.3) 
(0.8) 
(2.7) 

(4.2) 

1.4 

2011

Total cash

outfl ow / (infl ow)

£m

2.5

2.3

1.6

5.9

12.3

(5.0)

(4.6)

(11.5)

(8.2)

(29.3)

(17.0)

The Group manages interest rate risk, the risk that margins will be adversely affected by movements in market interest rates, by maintaining 

fl oating rate liabilities and matching these with fl oating rate assets, hedging fi xed rate assets and liabilities by the use of interest rate swap or 

cap agreements.

The rates of interest payable on the loan facilities and on asset backed loan notes issued in the securitisation process are reset quarterly on 

the basis of LIBOR. Where asset backed loan notes are issued in foreign currencies, cross-currency basis swaps are put in place converting 

the reference interest rate to a sterling LIBOR basis.

The Group’s loan assets predominantly bear LIBOR-linked interest rates or are hedged fi xed rate assets. The interest rates charged on the 

Group’s variable rate loan assets are determined by reference to, inter alia, the Group’s funding costs and the rates being charged on similar 

products in the market. Generally this ensures the matching of changes in interest rates on the Group’s loan assets and borrowings and any 

exposure arising on the interest rate resets is relatively short term. Forward rate agreements may be used to hedge against any perceived risk 

of temporary increases in LIBOR rates at month ends.

The return to the Group from its investments in structured entities is primarily attributable to the cash generation of the underlying portfolio. 

There is no direct exposure to market interest rate risk.

Until  the  optional  repayment  date  on  20  April  2012,  the  fi xed  rate  corporate  bond  was  hedged  by  use  of  a  long-term  interest  rate  swap 

agreement, of notional principal equal to the principal amount of the bond, which converted the interest payable to a LIBOR-linked fl oating rate 

basis. Since that date interest has been payable on the Bond at a fi xed rate of 3.729%.

The Group has entered into various interest rate basis swap arrangements to alter the effective basis of interest payments on certain borrowings 

to match the underlying assets, though due to their nature and the low notional value of these swaps, they do not have a signifi cant impact 

on the Group’s results.

The  Asset  and  Liability  Committee  monitors  the  interest  rate  risk  exposure  on  the  Group’s  loan  assets  and  asset  backed  loan  notes  and 

ensures compliance with the requirements of the trustees in respect of the Group’s securitisations.

To assess the Group’s exposure to interest rate movements the notional impact of a 1% change in UK interest rates on the equity of the Group 

at 30 September 2012, and the notional annualised impact of such a change on the operating profi t of the Group, based on the year-end 

balance sheet have been calculated. 

Notes to the accounts   73

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

On this basis a 1% increase in UK interest rates would reduce the Group’s equity at 30 September 2012 by £4.0m (2011: £4.2m) and increase 

profi t before tax by £8.4m (2011: £7.0m).

This calculation allows only for the direct effects of any change in UK interest rates. In practice such a change might have wider economic 

consequences which would themselves potentially affect the Group’s business and results.

Although certain of the Group’s borrowings have interest rates dependant on US Dollar and Euro LIBOR rates, the effect of the cross currency 

basis swaps is such that the Group’s results have no material exposure to movements in these rates. The effects of independent 1% increases 

in US or Euro interest rates would be to increase the Group’s equity by £1.2m (2011: £1.4m) and £2.0m (2011: £2.3m) respectively.

The only interest rate risk in the Company arose from the corporate bond described above, until it became a fi xed rate instrument in April 2012. 

Assets and liabilities with other group companies bear interest at fl oating rates based on LIBOR which reset within three months of the balance 

sheet date. The fi nance lease bears notional interest only; all other balances are non-interest bearing.

Currency risk

All of the Group’s assets and liabilities are denominated in sterling with the exception of the asset backed loan notes denominated in US dollars 

and euros, which are described in note 48. Although IAS 39 requires that they be accounted for as currency liabilities and valued at their spot 

rates, a condition of the issue of these notes was that interest rate and currency swaps were put in place for the duration of the borrowing, 

having the effect of converting the liability to a LIBOR-linked fl oating rate sterling borrowing. As a result the Group has no material exposure to 

foreign currency risk, and no sensitivity analysis is presented for currency risk. 

The equivalent sterling principal amounts of notes in issue under these arrangements, and their carrying values at 30 September 2012 and 

30 September 2011 are:

US dollar notes 

Euro notes 

2012 

Equivalent 

  sterling principal 

£m 

2,867.5 

1,983.0 

2012 
Carrying 
value 
£m 

3,342.7 
2,313.3 

2011 

Equivalent 

sterling principal 

£m 

2,956.0 

2,038.5 

2011

Carrying

value  

£m

3,573.7

2,571.6

4,850.5 

5,656.0 

4,994.5 

6,145.3

Fair values of fi nancial assets and fi nancial liabilities

Fair values have been determined for all derivatives, listed securities and any other fi nancial assets and liabilities for which an active and liquid 

market exists. 

Derivative  fi nancial  instruments  are  stated  at  their  fair  values  in  the  accounts.  The  Group  uses  a  number  of  techniques  to  determine  the            

fair values of its derivative assets and liabilities, for which observable prices in active markets are not available. These are principally present 

value  calculations  based  on  estimated  future  cash  fl ows  arising  from  the  instruments,  discounted  using  a  risk  adjusted  interest  rate.  The 

principal inputs to these valuation models are LIBOR benchmark interest rates for the currencies in which the instruments are denominated, 

sterling,  euros  and  dollars.  The  cross  currency  basis  swaps  have  a  notional  principal  related  to  the  outstanding  currency  borrowings  and 

therefore the estimated rate of repayment of these notes also affects the valuation of the swaps. In order to determine the fair values the 

management applies valuation adjustments to observed data where that data would not fully refl ect the attributes of the instrument being 

valued. The management reviews the models used on an ongoing basis to ensure that the valuations produced are reasonable and refl ect all 

relevant factors.

For assets and liabilities carried at fair value IFRS 7 requires that the measurements should be classifi ed using a fair value hierarchy refl ecting 

the  inputs  used,  and  defi nes  three  levels.  Level  1  measurements  are  unadjusted  market  prices,  level  2  measurements  are  derived  from 

observable data, such as market prices or rates, while level 3 measurements rely on signifi cant inputs which are not derived from observable 

data.  As  described  above  the  valuations  of  the  Group’s  derivatives  are  based  on  market  information  and  they  are  therefore  classifi ed 

as  level  2  measurements.  Details  of  these  assets  are  given  in  note  35.  The  Group  had  no  fi nancial  assets  or  liabilities  in  the  year  ended                                      

30 September 2012 or the year ended 30 September 2011 valued using level 1 or level 3 measurements. 

74   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

The fair values of cash and cash equivalents, bank loans and overdrafts and asset backed loan notes, which are carried at amortised cost, are 

not materially different from their book values because all the assets mature within three months of the year end and the interest rates charged 

on fi nancial liabilities reset on a quarterly basis. While the Group’s asset backed loan notes are listed, the quoted prices for an individual note 

may not be indicative of the fair value of the issue as a whole, due to the specialised nature of the market in such instruments and the limited 

number of investors participating in it.

In the absence of a liquid market in loan assets the directors have considered the estimated cash fl ows expected to arise from the Group’s 

investments in its loans to customers and have concluded that the carrying value of these assets, determined on the amortised cost basis, is 

not signifi cantly different from the fair value of the assets derived on a discounted cash fl ow basis.

7.  SEGMENTAL INFORMATION

For internal reporting purposes the Group is organised into two major operating divisions, First Mortgages and Consumer Finance. These 

divisions are the basis on which the Group reports segmental information.

The revenue generated by the First Mortgages segment includes interest and fees generated by the buy-to-let and owner-occupied mortgage 

assets and other income derived from fi rst charge mortgages. Consumer Finance revenue includes interest and fees generated by second 

charge loans, the residual car, retail fi nance and unsecured loan assets, and other sources of income derived from consumer loans. Both of 

these divisions include assets originated internally and assets acquired from third parties.

All of the Group’s operations are conducted in the United Kingdom, all revenues arise from external customers and there are no inter-segment 

revenues. No customer contributes more than 10% of the revenue of the Group.

Financial information about these business segments is shown below. 

Year ended 30 September 2012

Interest receivable 

Interest payable 

Net interest income 
Other operating income 

Total operating income 

Operating expenses 

Provisions for losses 

Fair value net gains / (losses) 

Operating profi t 

Tax charge 

Profi t after tax  

First 

Consumer 

mortgages 

£m 

fi nance 

£m 

231.1 

(128.1) 

103.0 
6.2 

109.2 

(35.2) 

(12.4) 

61.6 

1.6 

63.2 

62.7 

(7.9) 

54.8 
6.2 

61.0 

(16.7) 

(11.7) 

32.6 

(0.3) 

32.3 

Total

£m

293.8

(136.0)

157.8
12.4

170.2

(51.9)

(24.1)

94.2

1.3

95.5

(23.3)

72.2

Notes to the accounts   75

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Year ended 30 September 2011

Interest receivable 

Interest payable 

Net interest income 

Other operating income 

Total operating income 

Operating expenses 

Provisions for losses 

Fair value net gains / (losses) 

Operating profi t 

Tax charge 

Profi t after tax  

First 

Consumer 

mortgages 

£m 

fi nance 

£m 

214.7 

(114.0) 

100.7 

7.0 

107.7 

(34.8) 

(5.6) 

67.3 

(0.2) 

67.1 

43.3 

(8.2) 

35.1 

8.1 

43.2 

(10.6) 

(18.8) 

13.8 

(0.1) 

13.7 

Total

£m

258.0

(122.2)

135.8

15.1

150.9

(45.4)

(24.4)

81.1

(0.3)

80.8

(21.2)

59.6

The assets and liabilities attributable to each of the segments at 30 September 2012, 30 September 2011 and 30 September 2010 were:

30 September 2012 
Segment assets 

Segment liabilities 

30 September 2011 
Segment assets 

Segment liabilities 

30 September 2010 
Segment assets 

Segment liabilities 

All of the assets shown above were located in the United Kingdom.

First 

Consumer 

mortgages 

£m 

fi nance 

£m 

9,541.3 

(8,862.4) 

678.9 

10,009.3 

(9,400.2) 

609.1 

10,083.0 

(9,531.6) 

551.4 

495.8 

(371.2) 

124.6 

478.9 

(346.0) 

132.9 

562.6 

(422.0) 

140.6 

Total

£m

10,037.1

(9,233.6)

803.5

10,488.2

(9,746.2)

742.0

10,645.6

(9,953.6)

692.0

76   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
The total additions to non-current assets, excluding fi nancial instruments and deferred tax assets, attributable to each segment during the 

years ended 30 September 2012 and 30 September 2011 were:

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

2012 

2011 

Being:   

2012 

2011 

8. 

  REVENUE

Interest receivable 

Other income   

Total revenue   

 Arising from:  
First Mortgages 

Consumer Finance 

Total revenue   

9. 

  INTEREST RECEIVABLE

Interest on loans to customers 

Other interest receivable 

Income from structured entities   

Total interest on fi nancial assets   

Return on pension scheme assets   

First 

mortgages 

Consumer 

fi nance 

£m 

2.3 

2.9 

£m 

0.1 

0.1 

Total

£m

2.4

3.0

Intangible 

Property, plant 

Total

assets 

and equipment 

(Note 23) 

(Note 25) 

£m 

0.8 

1.0 

£m 

1.6 

2.0 

2012 
£m 

293.8 
12.4 

306.2 

237.3 
68.9 

306.2 

2012 
£m 

282.0 
2.8 
5.5 

290.3 
3.5 

293.8 

£m

2.4

3.0

2011

£m

258.0

15.1

273.1

221.7

51.4

273.1

2011

£m

250.9

2.8

0.7

254.4

3.6

258.0

Interest on loans to customers includes £9.8m (2011: £10.7m) charged on accounts where an impairment provision has been made.

Notes to the accounts   77

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

10.    INTEREST PAYABLE AND SIMILAR CHARGES

On asset backed loan notes 

On corporate bond 

On bank loans and overdrafts 

Total interest on fi nancial liabilities 

On pension scheme liability 

On fi nance leases 

Other fi nance costs 

11.    OTHER OPERATING INCOME

Loan account fee income 

Insurance income 

Third party servicing 

Other income   

12.    OPERATING EXPENSES

Employment costs  

Auditor remuneration  

Amortisation of intangible assets  

Depreciation    

Operating lease rentals  

Other administrative costs 

Note 

13 

16 

23 

25 

57 

2012 
£m 

101.5 
3.9 
24.8 

130.2 
3.9 
1.0 
0.9 

136.0 

2012 
£m 

5.0 
2.5 
3.9 
1.0 

12.4 

2012 
£m 

33.1 
1.2 
1.0 
2.1 
2.6 
11.9 

51.9 

2011

£m

90.6

3.6

22.8

117.0

3.8

1.1

0.3

122.2

2011

£m

5.7

1.9

5.8

1.7

15.1

2011

£m

27.9

0.9

0.9

2.0

2.5

11.2

45.4

78   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

13.    EMPLOYEES

The average number of persons (including directors) employed by the Group during the year was 722 (2011: 651). The number of employees 

at the end of the year was 754 (2011: 691).

Staff costs incurred during the year in respect of these employees were:

Share based remuneration 

Other wages and salaries 

Total wages and salaries 

National Insurance on share based remuneration 

Other social security costs 

Total social security costs 

Defi ned benefi t pension cost 

Other pension costs 

Total pension costs 

Total staff costs 

2012 

£m 

2.8 

25.3 

1.0 

2.3 

1.5 

0.2 

2011 

£m 

2.0 

22.4 

0.5 

1.9 

0.9 

0.2 

2012 
£m 

28.1 

3.3 

1.7 

33.1 

2011

£m

24.4

2.4

1.1

27.9

Details of the pension schemes operated by the Group are given in note 50.

The Company has no employees. Details of the directors’ remuneration are given in note 14. 

14.    KEY MANAGEMENT REMUNERATION

The remuneration of the directors, who are the key management personnel of the Group and the Company, is set out below in aggregate in 

accordance with IAS 24 – ‘Related Party Transactions’. Further information about the remuneration of individual directors is provided in the 
Report of the Board to the Shareholders on Directors’ Remuneration on pages 31 to 36.

Short-term employee benefi ts 

Post-employment benefi ts 

Termination benefi ts 

Share based payment 

2012 
£m 

3.4 
0.5 
- 
1.4 

5.3 

2011

£m

2.8

0.4

-

1.2

4.4

Notes to the accounts   79

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

15.    SHARE BASED REMUNERATION

During the year the Group had various share based payment arrangements with employees. They are accounted for by the Group and the 

Company as shown below.

The effect of the share based payment arrangements on the Group’s profi t is shown in note 13.

Further details of share based payment arrangements are given in the Report of the Board to the Shareholders on Directors’ Remuneration 

on pages 31 to 36.

(a)  

  Share option schemes

Options under the Executive Share Option (‘Executive’) schemes have been granted to directors and senior employees from time to time, on 

the basis of performance and at the discretion of the Remuneration Committee. These options vest so long as the grantee is still employed 

by the Group at the end of the vesting period and, where applicable, performance criteria have been satisfi ed. The Executive schemes are no 

longer available for the grant of further awards.

The Group also operates an All Employee Share Option (‘Sharesave’) scheme. Grants under this scheme vest after the completion of the 

appropriate service period and subject to a savings requirement.

A reconciliation of movements in the number and weighted average exercise price of options over £1 ordinary shares during the year ended 

30 September 2012 and the year ended 30 September 2011 is shown below.

Options outstanding 
At 1 October 2011 

Granted in the year 

Exercised in the year 

Lapsed during the year 

At 30 September 2012 

Options exercisable 

2012 

Number 

2012 
Weighted 
average 
exercise price 
p 

2011 

Number 

2011

Weighted 

average

exercise price  

p

3,385,388 

1,117,800 

(377,402) 

(615,602) 

202.63 
142.56 
63.51 
323.15 

4,751,394 

- 

(1,122,985) 

(243,021) 

3,510,184 

132.40 

3,385,388 

764,627 

437.64 

1,688,482 

177.17

-

63.00

350.10

202.63

326.87

The weighted average remaining contractual life of options outstanding at 30 September 2012 was 16.6 months (2011: 12.7 months). The 

weighted average market price at exercise for share options exercised in the year was 168.47p (2011: 150.29p).

80   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Options are outstanding under the Executive and Sharesave schemes to purchase ordinary shares as follows:

Grant date  

  Period exercisable 

Exercise 

price 

Number 
2012 

Executive schemes 
27/11/2001 

29/07/2002 

14/03/2003 

18/12/2003 

01/12/2004 

Sharesave schemes 
28/07/2006 

20/06/2007 

18/07/2008 

18/07/2008 

20/07/2010 

20/07/2010 

20/12/2011 

20/12/2011 

  27/11/2004 to 27/11/2011  

  29/07/2005 to 29/07/2012  

  14/03/2006 to 14/03/2013  

  18/12/2006 to 18/12/2013  

  01/12/2007 to 01/12/2014  

  01/09/2011 to 01/03/2012 

  01/08/2012 to 01/02/2013 

  01/09/2011 to 01/03/2012 

  01/09/2013 to 01/03/2014 

  01/09/2013 to 01/03/2014 

  01/09/2015 to 01/03/2016 

  01/02/2015 to 01/08/2015 

  01/02/2017 to 01/08/2017 

395.34p 

297.30p 

297.30p 

540.40p 

555.34p 

837.73p 

685.84p 

63.00p 

63.00p 

100.32p 

100.32p 

142.56p 

142.56p 

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Number

2011

313,650

238,374

336,348

188,190

236,942

- 
- 
336,348 
188,190 
236,942 

761,480 

1,313,504

- 
3,147 
- 
1,031,760 
441,073 
183,876 
920,643 
168,205 

191

4,006

374,787

1,031,760

471,104

190,036

-

-

2,748,704 

2,071,884

3,510,184 

3,385,388

The numbers of share options outstanding and the exercise prices under each of the arrangements shown above which was outstanding 

at the time of the share consolidation on 29 January 2008 and the rights issue on 21 February 2008 were adjusted in accordance with the 

respective scheme rules.

A number of the above options were granted to former employees whose rights terminate at the later of 12 months following redundancy or 

42 months after the issue of the options.

The fair value of options granted is determined using a Binomial model. No awards were made in the year ended 30 September 2011. Details 

of the awards over £1 ordinary shares made in the year ended 30 September 2012, which were all made under the Sharesave scheme, are 

shown below.

Grant date  

Number of awards granted 

Market price at date of grant 

Contractual life (years) 

Fair value per share at date of grant  

Inputs to valuation model 
Expected volatility 

Expected life at grant date (years) 

Risk-free interest rate 

Expected dividend yield 

Expected annual departures 

20/12/11 

20/12/11

945,387 

172,413

175.50p 

3.0 

71.67p 

66.27% 

3.5 

1.35% 

2.28% 

5.00% 

175.50p

5.0

72.05p

66.27%

5.5

1.35%

2.28%

5.00%

The expected volatility of the share price used in determining the fair value is based on the annualised standard deviation of daily changes in 

price over the six years preceding the grant date. 

Notes to the accounts   81

 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

(b)  

  Paragon Performance Share Plan

Awards  under  this  plan  comprise  a  right  to  acquire  ordinary  shares  in  the  Company  for  nil  or  nominal  payment  and  will  vest  on  the  third 

anniversary of their granting, to the extent that the applicable performance criteria have been satisfi ed, if the holder is still employed by the 

Group. The awards will lapse to the extent that the performance condition has not been satisfi ed on the third anniversary.

The conditional entitlements outstanding under this scheme at 30 September 2012 and 30 September 2011 were:

Grant date  

  Period exercisable 

09/01/2007 

28/03/2007 

14/06/2007 

26/09/2007 

26/11/2007 

18/03/2008 

29/09/2008 

21/05/2009 

04/01/2010 

02/09/2010 

17/12/2010 

21/12/2011 

  09/01/2010 to 09/01/2017 † 

  28/03/2010 to 28/03/2017 † 

  14/06/2010 to 14/06/2017 † 

  26/09/2010 to 26/09/2017 † 

  26/11/2010 to 26/11/2017 † 

  18/03/2011 to 18/03/2018 † 

  29/09/2011 to 29/09/2018 † 

  21/05/2012 to 21/05/2019 † 

  04/01/2013 to 04/01/2020 * 

  02/09/2013 to 02/09/2020 * 

  17/12/2013 to 17/12/2020 * 

  21/12/2014 to 21/12/2021 * 

Number 
2012 

3,294 
3,164 
6,320 
10,032 
30,588 
103,345 
278,287 
2,605,821 
1,797,822 
141,844 
1,906,736 
2,154,577 

Number

2011

3,294

3,164

27,964

54,423

97,578

103,345

1,638,646

3,221,335

1,797,822

141,844

1,906,736

-

9,041,830 

8,996,151

†   These awards, which were conditional on the achievement of performance based criteria, have now vested.

* 

 The receipt of these shares is subject to a performance condition comparing the rank of the Company’s TSR against a comparator group 

of companies comprising the constituents of the FTSE-250 on the date of grant over the three years commencing on the date of grant. 

25% of the awards will vest for median performance, increasing on a straight line basis to full vesting for upper quartile performance.

The number of share options outstanding and the exercise price under each of the arrangements shown above which were outstanding at the 

time of the share consolidation on 29 January 2008 and the rights issue on 21 February 2008 were adjusted in accordance with the respective 

scheme rules.

The fair value of awards granted under the Performance Share Plan is determined using a Monte Carlo simulation model, to take account of 

the effect of the market based condition. Details of the awards over £1 ordinary shares made in the year ended 30 September 2012 and the 

year ended 30 September 2011 are shown below:

Grant date  

Number of awards granted 

Market price at date of grant 

Fair value per share at date of grant  

Inputs to valuation model 
Expected volatility 

Risk-free interest rate 

Expected dividend yield 

21/12/11 

17/12/10

2,154,576 

1,907,443

176.90p 

105.53p 

182.00p

123.86p

45.13% 

1.35% 

2.26% 

72.58%

1.98%

1.69%

For all of the above grants the contractual life and expected life at grant date is three years and no departures are expected.

For  awards  granted  before  18  July  2008  the  expected  volatility  of  the  share  price  used  in  determining  the  fair  value  was  based  on  the 

annualised standard deviation of daily changes in price over the previous year from the grant date. The expected volatility for awards granted 

between this date and 30 September 2008 is calculated using the same method but using daily changes in price over the six years preceding 

the grant date. The expected volatility for awards granted after this date is calculated using the same method but using daily changes in price 

over the three years preceding the grant date.

82   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

(c)  

  Deferred bonus awards

Awards under this scheme comprise a right to acquire ordinary shares in the Company for nil or nominal payment and will vest on the third 

anniversary of their granting.

The conditional entitlements outstanding under this scheme at 30 September 2012 and 30 September 2011 were:

Grant date  

  Period exercisable 

05/01/2010 

11/01/2011 

21/12/2011 

  01/10/2012 to 30/09/2013 

  01/10/2013 to 30/09/2014 

  01/10/2014 to 30/09/2015 

Number 
2012 

169,287 
215,654 
301,025 

Number

2011

169,287

215,654

-

685,966 

384,941

The shares awarded can be exercised from one year from the vesting date. The vesting date is the third anniversary of the start of the fi nancial 

year in which the grant is awarded.

The fair value of Deferred Bonus awards issued in the year was determined using a Black-Scholes Merton model. Details of the awards over 

£1 ordinary shares made in the year ended 30 September 2012 and the year ended 30 September 2011 are shown below.

Grant date  

Number of awards granted 

Market price at date of grant 

Fair value per share at date of grant  

Inputs to valuation model 
Risk-free interest rate 

Expected dividend yield 

(d)  

  Matching share plan

21/12/11 

11/1/11

301,025 

215,654

176.90p 

165.30p 

188.50p

178.00p

1.35% 

2.26% 

2.16%

1.91%

Awards  under  this  plan  comprise  a  right  to  acquire  ordinary  shares  in  the  Company  for  nil  or  nominal  payment  and  will  vest  on  the  third 

anniversary of their granting to the extent that the applicable performance criteria have been satisfi ed, if the holder is still employed by the 
Group. The awards will lapse to the extent that the performance condition has not been satisfi ed on the third anniversary.

The conditional entitlements outstanding under this scheme at 30 September 2012 and at 30 September 2011 were:

Grant date  

  Transfer date 

09/01/2007 

02/01/2008 

05/01/2010 

  09/01/2010 † 

  02/01/2011 † 

  05/01/2013 * 

Number 
2012 

5,625 
22,329 
142,347 

Number

2011

5,625

22,329

142,347

170,301 

170,301

†   These awards, which were conditional on the achievement of performance based criteria, have now vested.

* 

 The receipt of these shares is subject to a performance condition comparing the rank of the Company’s TSR against a comparator group 

of companies comprising the constituents of the FTSE-250 on the date of grant over the three years commencing on the date of grant. 

25% of the awards will vest for median performance, increasing on a straight line basis to full vesting for upper quartile performance.

Notes to the accounts   83

 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

The numbers of share options outstanding and the exercise prices under each of the arrangements shown above which was outstanding 

at the time of the share consolidation on 29 January 2008 and the rights issue on 21 February 2008 were adjusted in accordance with the 

respective scheme rules.

The fair value of awards granted under the Matching Share Plan is determined using a Monte Carlo simulation model, to take account of the 

effect of the market based condition. No awards were made in the year ended 30 September 2012 or the year ended 30 September 2011. 

16.    AUDITOR REMUNERATION

The analysis of fees payable to the Company’s auditors and their associates, excluding irrecoverable VAT, required by the Companies (Disclosure 

of Auditor Remuneration and Liability Limitation Agreements) Regulations 2008 is set out below. This analysis includes amounts charged to the 

profi t and loss account or included within the issue costs of debt and equity in respect of fees paid to the Group auditors and their associates.

Audit fee of the company 
Other services 
Audit of subsidiary undertakings pursuant to legislation 

Total audit fees 

Audit related assurance services  

Interim review 

Other    

Tax compliance services 

Tax advisory services 

Other assurance services 

Securitisation reporting 

Other services  

Total fees    

Irrecoverable VAT 

Total cost to the Group 

Of which:    

Charged to profi t and loss account (note 12) 

Included in issue costs of debt 

Total cost to the Group 

2011 

£000 

40 

10 

130 

120 

2012 

£000 

40 

- 

118 

295 

2012 
£000 

172 

288 

460 

40 

413 

59 
102 

1,074 
215 

1,289 

1,219 
70 

1,289 

2011

£000

157

293

450

50

250

-

-

750

141

891

891

-

891

In addition to the amounts above, the auditors received fees of £7,000 (2011: £7,000), excluding VAT, in respect of the audit of the Group 

pension scheme.

Fees paid to the auditors and their associates for non-audit services to the Company are not disclosed because the consolidated accounts of 

the Group are required to disclose such fees on a consolidated basis.

84   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
17.    PROVISIONS FOR LOSSES

Impairment of fi nancial assets (note 32) 

 First mortgage loans 

 Other secured loans 

 Finance lease receivables 

 Retail fi nance loans 

 Other loans 

18.    FAIR VALUE NET GAINS / (LOSSES)

Net gain on derivatives designated as fair value hedges 

Fair value adjustments from hedge accounting 

Ineffectiveness of fair value hedges   

Ineffectiveness of cash fl ow hedges  

Net gains / (losses) on other derivatives 

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

2012 
£m 

12.2 
6.0 
0.5 
0.1 
5.3 

24.1 

2012 
£m 

2.2 
(2.2) 

- 
- 
1.3 

1.3 

2011

£m

5.6

11.1

1.3

0.2

6.2

24.4

2011

£m

5.2

(5.2)

-

-

(0.3)

(0.3)

The fair value net gain / (loss) represents the accounting volatility on derivative instruments which are matching risk exposure on an economic 

basis  generated  by  the  requirements  of  IAS  39.  Some  accounting  volatility  arises  on  these  items  due  to  accounting  ineffectiveness  on 

designated hedges, or because hedge accounting has not been adopted or is not achievable on certain items. The losses and gains are 

primarily due to timing differences in income recognition between the derivative instruments and the economically hedged assets and liabilities. 

Such differences will reverse over time and have no impact on the cash fl ows of the Group.

19.    TAX CHARGE ON PROFIT ON ORDINARY ACTIVITIES

(a)  

  Analysis of charge in the year

Current tax 
UK Corporation Tax on profi ts of the period 

Adjustment in respect of prior periods 

Total current tax  

Deferred tax 

Tax charge on profi t on ordinary activities 

2012 
£m 

20.0 
(0.4) 

19.6 
3.7 

23.3 

2011

£m

14.6

0.3

14.9

6.3

21.2

Notes to the accounts   85

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

(b)  

  Deferred tax charge for the year

The deferred tax charge in the income statement comprises the following temporary differences:

Accelerated tax depreciation 

Retirement benefi t obligations 

Impairment and other provisions  

Utilisation of tax losses 

Other timing differences 

Deferred tax charge for the year   

Recognition of asset not previously recognised 

Change in tax rate 

Deferred tax charge (note 51) 

2012 
£m 

0.1 
0.3 
1.8 
3.0 
(0.3) 

4.9 

- 
(1.2) 

3.7 

2011

£m

0.2

0.6

1.0

6.1

(0.8)

7.1

-

(0.8)

6.3

During the year ended 30 September 2011 the United Kingdom Government enacted provisions reducing the rate of corporation tax to 26% 

with effect from 1 April 2011 and 25% from 1 April 2012. During the year ended 30 September 2012 the Government enacted provisions 

further reducing the rate of corporation tax to 24% with effect from 1 April 2012 and 23% from 1 April 2013. Therefore the standard rate of 

corporation tax applicable to the Group for the year ended 30 September 2012 is 25% and the rate is expected to be 23.5% in the year 

ending 30 September 2013 and 23% thereafter. The expected impact of the change to 25% on the values at which deferred tax amounts are 

expected to crystallise was accounted for in the year ended 30 September 2011, while the expected impacts of the changes to 24% and 23% 

have been accounted for in the year ended 30 September 2012.

The Government has announced its intention to make further reductions in the rate of corporation tax in future years. The effect of any such 

changes on deferred tax balances will be accounted for in the period in which any such changes are enacted.

(c)  

  Factors affecting tax charge for the year

The tax assessed for the year is lower than the standard rate of corporation tax in the United Kingdom of 25% (2011: 27%). The differences 

are explained below:

Profi t on ordinary activities before taxation 

Profi t on ordinary activities multiplied by standard rate of 

 corporation tax in the UK of 25% (2011: 27%) 

Effects of:  

 Permanent differences 

 Change in rate of taxation on deferred tax assets and liabilities 

 Prior year (credit) / charge  

Tax charge for the year 

2012 
£m 

95.5 

23.9 

1.0 
(1.2) 
(0.4) 

23.3 

2011

£m

80.8

21.8

(0.1)

(0.8)

0.3

21.2

86   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

20.     PROFIT  ATTRIBUTABLE  TO  MEMBERS  OF  THE  PARAGON  GROUP 

OF COMPANIES PLC

The Company’s profi t after tax for the fi nancial year amounted to £61.1m (2011: £61.9m). A separate income statement has not been prepared 

for the Company under the provisions of Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006.

The Company has no other items of comprehensive income for the years ended 30 September 2012 or 30 September 2011.

21.     EARNINGS PER SHARE

Earnings per ordinary share is calculated as follows:

Profi t for the year (£m) 

Basic weighted average number of ordinary shares ranking for 

 dividend during the year (million) 

Dilutive effect of the weighted average number of share options 

 and incentive plans in issue during the year (million) 

Diluted weighted average number of ordinary shares ranking for 

 dividend during the year (million) 

Earnings per ordinary share  

- basic 

- diluted 

2012 

72.2 

297.8 

9.4 

2011

59.6

295.3

8.2

307.2 

303.5

24.2p 
23.5p 

20.2p

19.6p

22.     TAX CREDITED / (CHARGED) TO EQUITY

On actuarial (loss) on pension scheme (note 50) 

On gains on cash fl ow hedges (note 42) 

Tax on items taken to equity 

On share based payment (note 43)   

Total tax credited to equity 

Of which     

Current tax 

Deferred tax (note 51) 

  The Group 

The Company

2012 

£m 

(0.2) 
0.4 

0.2 
0.9 

1.1 

- 
1.1 

1.1 

2011 
£m 

(0.3) 

- 

(0.3) 

0.1 

(0.2) 

- 

(0.2) 

(0.2) 

2012 
£m 

2011
£m

- 
- 

- 
- 

- 

- 
- 

- 

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Included in tax credited to equity in the year ended 30 September 2012 is £0.4m (2011: £0.4m) charged in respect of the effect of the changes 

in corporation tax rates described in note 19 on deferred tax assets.

Notes to the accounts   87

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

23.    INTANGIBLE ASSETS

Goodwill 

(note 24) 

Computer 

software 

Cost  
At 1 October 2010 

Additions    

Disposals    

At 30 September 2011 

Additions    

Disposals    

At 30 September 2012 

Accumulated amortisation  
At 1 October 2010 

Amortisation charge for the year   

On disposals   

At 30 September 2011 

Amortisation charge for the year   

On disposals   

At 30 September 2012 

Net book value 
At 30 September 2012 

At 30 September 2011 

At 30 September 2010 

£m 

7.6 

- 

- 

7.6 

- 

- 

7.6 

6.0 

- 

- 

6.0 

- 

- 

6.0 

1.6 

1.6 

1.6 

£m 

2.6 

1.0 

(0.3) 

3.3 

0.8 

- 

4.1 

2.2 

0.3 

(0.3) 

2.2 

0.5 

- 

2.7 

1.4 

1.1 

0.4 

Other  

intangible 

assets

£m 

8.1 

- 

- 

8.1 

- 

- 

8.1 

0.9 

0.6 

- 

1.5 

0.5 

- 

2.0 

6.1 

6.6 

7.2 

Total

£m

18.3

1.0

(0.3)

19.0

0.8

-

19.8

9.1

0.9

(0.3)

9.7

1.0

-

10.7

9.1

9.3

9.2

Other intangible assets comprise brands and the benefi t of business networks recognised on the acquisition of subsidiary companies.

24.    GOODWILL

The goodwill carried in the accounts was recognised on the acquisition of The Business Mortgage Company and its subsidiaries (‘TBMC’) 

in  December  2008.  The  cash  generating  unit  to  which  this  goodwill  was  attributed  for  impairment  testing  purposes  was  TBMC,  which  is 

the lowest level within the Group at which this goodwill is currently monitored, though the operations of the acquired entity will, in time, be 

integrated with those of the First Mortgage division.

An impairment review undertaken at 30 September 2009 indicated a write down of £6.0m which was charged to the profi t and loss account. 

Further reviews were undertaken at 30 September 2012 and each intervening year-end, which indicated no further impairment.

The recoverable amount of TBMC used in this impairment testing is determined on a value in use basis using pre-tax cash fl ow projections 

based on fi nancial budgets approved by the Board covering a four year period. The pre-tax discount rate applied to the cash fl ow projection 

is 6.07% and cash fl ows beyond the four year budget are extrapolated using a 2.00% growth rate, being the average long term growth rate in 

the United Kingdom economy over a 20 year period.

88   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

The key assumptions underlying the value in use calculation for the TBMC business are:

• 

 Level of business activity, based on management expectations. Management have concluded that the levels of activity assumed for the 

purpose of this forecast are reasonable, based on past experience and the current economic environment

•  Discount rate, which is based on the Group’s cost of capital

The directors believe that no reasonably possible change in any of the key assumptions above would cause the carrying value of the unit to 

exceed its recoverable amount.

25.    PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

(a)  

  The Group

Cost  
At 1 October 2010  

Additions    

Disposals    

At 30 September 2011 

Additions    

Disposals    

At 30 September 2012 

Accumulated depreciation 
At 1 October 2010 

Charge for the year 

On disposals   

At 30 September 2011 

Charge for the year 

On disposals   

At 30 September 2012 

Net book value 
At 30 September 2012 

At 30 September 2011 

At 30 September 2010 

Land and 

Buildings 

£m 

Plant and 

machinery 

£m 

24.3 

0.4 

(0.4) 

24.3 

0.4 

- 

24.7 

14.1 

1.2 

(0.4) 

14.9 

1.4 

- 

16.3 

8.4 

9.4 

10.2 

9.8 

1.6 

(4.3) 

7.1 

1.2 

(1.6) 

6.7 

7.8 

0.8 

(3.5) 

5.1 

0.7 

(1.4) 

4.4 

2.3 

2.0 

2.0 

Total

£m

34.1

2.0

(4.7)

31.4

1.6

(1.6)

31.4

21.9

2.0

(3.9)

20.0

2.1

(1.4)

20.7

10.7

11.4

12.2

The  net  book  value  of  land  and  buildings  includes  £6.7m  in  respect  of  land  and  buildings  held  under  fi nance  leases  (2011:  £7.7m,                        

2010: £8.8m).

Notes to the accounts   89

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

(b)  

  The Company

Cost  
At 1 October 2010, 30 September 2011 and 30 September 2012 

Accumulated depreciation 
At 1 October 2010 

Charge for the year 

At 30 September 2011 

Charge for the year 

At 30 September 2012 

Net book value 
At 30 September 2012 

At 30 September 2011 

At 30 September 2010  

The net book value of land and buildings represents buildings held under fi nance leases.

26.    INVESTMENT IN SUBSIDIARY UNDERTAKINGS

At 1 October 2010 

Loans advanced 
Loans repaid   

Provision movements 

At 30 September 2011 

Loans advanced 

Loans repaid   

Provision movements 

At 30 September 2012 

Shares in Group 

Loans to Group 

Loans to ESOP  

companies 

companies 

£m 

252.5 

- 
- 

(0.2) 

252.3 

- 

- 

(116.3) 

136.0 

£m 

507.7 

17.4 
(34.9) 

- 

490.2 

14.2 

(23.9) 

- 

480.5 

trusts 

£m 

4.2 

1.5 
- 

(1.3) 

4.4 

2.1 

- 

(0.4) 

6.1 

Land and

buildings

£m

20.8

12.0

1.1

13.1

1.0

14.1

6.7

7.7

8.8

Total

£m

764.4

18.9
(34.9)

(1.5)

746.9

16.3

(23.9)

(116.7)

622.6

During the year ended 30 September 2012 the Company received £164.7m in dividend income from its subsidiaries (2011: £54.8m) and 

£32.3m of interest on loans to Group companies (2011: £31.7m). 

The principal operating subsidiaries, and the nature of the Group’s interest in them, are shown in note 27.

90   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

27.    PRINCIPAL OPERATING SUBSIDIARIES

Principal operating subsidiaries where the share capital is held within the Group comprise:

Holding 

Principal activity

Direct subsidiaries of The Paragon Group of Companies PLC 
Paragon Finance PLC  

Mortgage Trust Limited 

Paragon Mortgages Limited 

Paragon Mortgages (2010) Limited 

Paragon Vehicle Contracts Limited  

Paragon Car Finance Limited  

Paragon Personal Finance Limited 

Moorgate Servicing Limited 

Redbrick Real Estate Services Limited 

Idem Capital Limited 

Idem Jersey (No. 1) Limited 

Paragon Fourth Funding Limited 

The Business Mortgage Company Limited 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 7) PLC 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 8) PLC 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 9) PLC 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 10) PLC 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 11) PLC 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 12) PLC 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 13) PLC 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 14) PLC 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 15) PLC 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 16) PLC 

Paragon Personal and Auto Finance (No. 3) PLC 

Paragon Secured Finance (No. 1) PLC 

First Flexible (No. 7) PLC 

Subsidiary of Paragon Mortgages Limited 
Paragon Second Funding Limited  

Subsidiaries of Mortgage Trust Limited 
Mortgage Trust Services plc 

First Flexible No. 6 PLC 

Subsidiaries of Moorgate Servicing Limited 
Redbrick Survey and Valuation Limited 

Moorgate Loan Servicing Limited 

Subsidiaries of Idem Capital Limited 
Idem (No. 1) Limited 

Idem (No. 3) Limited 

Idem Capital Securities Limited 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% * 

100% * 

100% * 

100% * 

100% * 

100% * 

100% * 

100%  

100% 

100% 

Residential mortgages and asset administration

Residential mortgages 

Residential mortgages

Residential mortgages

Vehicle fl eet management

Vehicle fi nance

Unsecured lending

Intermediate holding company

Property services

Asset investment

Asset investment

Residential mortgages

Mortgage broker

Residential mortgages

Residential mortgages

Residential mortgages

Residential mortgages

Residential mortgages

Residential mortgages

Residential mortgages

Residential mortgages

Residential mortgages

Residential mortgages

Loan and vehicle fi nance

Loan fi nance

100% * 

Residential mortgages 

100% 

Residential mortgages and loan and vehicle fi nance

100% 

74% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

Residential mortgages and asset administration

Residential mortgages

Surveyors and property consulting

Asset administration

Asset investment

Asset investment

Asset investment

The  holdings  shown  above  are  those  held  by  the  Group.  The  shareholdings  of  the  Company  are  the  same  as  those  held  by  the  parent 

company identifi ed above, except that for the shareholdings marked * the parent company holds only 74% of the share capital, the remainder 

being held by other group companies.

The fi nancial year end of all of the Group’s subsidiary companies is 30 September, with the exception of The Business Mortgage Company 

Limited, the year end of which is 31 December. They are all registered in England and Wales, except Idem Jersey (No. 1) Limited, which is 

registered in the Bailiwick of Jersey, and they all operate in the United Kingdom.

The issued share capital of all subsidiaries consists of ordinary share capital, except that First Flexible No. 6 PLC has additional preference 

share capital held by the Group. The non-controlling interest in this company is not material.

Notes to the accounts   91

 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

In addition, prior to its acquisition by the Group, certain loans originated by Mortgage Trust Limited had been sold to special purpose entity 

companies, ultimately benefi cially owned by charitable trusts, which had raised non-recourse fi nance to fund these purchases. The Group 

is considered to control these entities, as defi ned by SIC-12 ‘Special Purpose Entities’ and hence they are considered to be subsidiaries of      

the Group.

The principal companies party to these arrangements are First Flexible No. 4 plc and First Flexible No. 5 plc. The principal activity of both of 

these companies is residential mortgages.

28.    FINANCIAL ASSETS

(a)  

  The Group

Loans and receivables  

Finance lease receivables  

Loans to customers  

Fair value adjustments from portfolio hedging  

Investments in structured entities  

Derivative fi nancial assets  

(b)  

  The Company

Derivative fi nancial assets  

Note 

29 

30 

31 

33 

34 

35 

Note 

35 

2012 
£m 

8,692.1 
2.5 

8,694.6 
1.1 

9.1 
800.4 

2011 

£m 

8,716.7 

7.5 

8,724.2 

3.4 

11.8 

1,151.8 

2010  

£m

8,890.2

21.0

8,911.2

8.6

-

1,160.3

9,505.2 

9,891.2 

10,080.1

2012 
£m 

- 

- 

2011 

£m 

4.0 

4.0 

2010  

£m

8.0

8.0

92   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

29.    LOANS AND RECEIVABLES

Loans  and  receivables  at  30  September  2012,  30  September  2011  and  30  September  2010,  which  are  all  denominated  and  payable  in 

sterling, were:

First mortgage loans 

Secured loans  

Retail fi nance loans 

Other unsecured loans 

2012 
£m 

8,295.6 
279.9 
2.0 
114.6 

2011 

£m 

8,360.4 

340.1 

2.9 

13.3 

2010  

£m

8,475.6

391.9

4.8

17.9

8,692.1 

8,716.7 

8,890.2

First mortgages are secured on residential property within the United Kingdom; secured loans enjoy second charges on residential property. 

Retail fi nance loans are unsecured. The estimated value of the security held against those loans above which are considered to be impaired or 

past due, representing the lesser of the outstanding balance and the estimated valuation of the property for each such account was:

First mortgage loans 

Secured loans  

2012 
£m 

70.7 
41.6 

112.3 

2011  

£m

83.1

46.2

129.3

Mortgage  loans  have  a  contractual  term  of  up  to  30  years,  secured  loans  up  to  25  years,  retail  fi nance  loans  up  to  ten  years  and  other 

unsecured loans up to ten years. In all cases the borrower is entitled to settle the loan at any point and in most cases early settlement does 

take place. All borrowers are required to make monthly payments, except where an initial deferred period is included in the contractual terms.

Under the terms of certain fi rst mortgage products, the customer has the right to draw down further funds. At 30 September 2012 the Group’s 

commitment in respect of such facilities was £32.3m (2011: £37.0m). 

The loans shown above pledged as collateral for the liabilities described in note 48 at 30 September 2012 and 30 September 2011 were:

30 September 2012 
In respect of:   

Asset backed loan notes 

  Warehouse facilities 

Total pledged as collateral 

Not pledged as collateral 

30 September 2011 
In respect of:   

Asset backed loan notes 

  Warehouse facilities 

Total pledged as collateral 

Not pledged as collateral 

First  

Consumer 

mortgages 

£m 

fi nance 

£m 

6,674.4 

1,582.7 

8,257.1 

38.5 

8,295.6 

6,714.0 

1,604.1 

8,318.1 

42.3 

8,360.4 

282.2 

- 

282.2 

114.3 

396.5 

333.9 

- 

333.9 

22.4 

356.3 

Total

£m

6,956.6

1,582.7

8,539.3

152.8

8,692.1

7,047.9

1,604.1

8,652.0 

64.7

8,716.7

Notes to the accounts   93

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

30.    FINANCE LEASE RECEIVABLES

The Group’s fi nance lease receivables are car fi nance loans. The average contractual life of such loans is 56 months (2011: 56 months), but it 

is likely that a signifi cant proportion of customers will choose to settle their obligations early.

The minimum lease payments due under these loan agreements are:

Amounts receivable 
Within one year 

Within two to fi ve years 

After fi ve years 

Less: future fi nance income 

Present value   

2012 
£m 

1.6 
1.7 
- 

3.3 
(0.2) 

3.1 

The present values of those payments, net of provisions for impairment, carried in the accounts are:

Amounts receivable 
Within one year 

Within two to fi ve years 

After fi ve years 

Allowance for uncollectible amounts  

Provision for recoveries 

2012 
£m 

1.5 
1.6 
- 

3.1 

(1.2) 
0.6 

2.5 

2011 

£m 

5.2 

3.0 

0.2 

8.4 

(0.5) 

7.9 

2011 

£m 

4.9 

2.8 

0.2 

7.9 

(1.4) 

1.0 

7.5 

2010  

£m

12.4

9.5

0.7

22.6

(1.4)

21.2

2010  

£m

11.6

8.9

0.7

21.2

(1.8)

1.6

21.0

The Group considers that the fair value of its fi nance lease receivables is not signifi cantly different to their carrying values. Whilst the Group has 

the benefi t of the underlying vehicle as security on these loans, no account of this is taken in the allowance for uncollectible amounts shown 

above. The Group has insuffi cient information on the current condition of fi nance leased vehicles to derive a reliable estimate of the value which 

could be realised from vehicles to offset against arrears accounts. Accordingly, no such disclosure is provided.

The loans shown above pledged as collateral for liabilities at 30 September 2012 and 30 September 2011 were:

In respect of:   

 Asset backed loan notes 
 Warehouse facilities 

Total pledged as collateral 

Not pledged as collateral 

94   Notes to the accounts

2012 
£m 

1.9 
- 

1.9 
0.6 

2.5 

2011

£m

6.4
-

6.4

1.1

7.5

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

31.    LOANS TO CUSTOMERS

The movements in the Group’s investment in loans to customers in the year ended 30 September 2012 and the year ended 30 September 

2011 were:

Cost 
At 1 October 2011 

Additions    

Disposals    

Effective Interest Rate (‘EIR’) adjustments 

Other debits 

Provision charge (note 32) 

Repayments and redemptions 

At 30 September 2012 

2012 
£m 

8,724.2 
310.0 
(5.9) 
6.7 
283.2 
(24.1) 
(599.5) 

2011

£m

8,911.2

151.7

-

(17.3)

279.2

(24.4)

(576.2)

8,694.6 

8,724.2

‘Other debits’ includes primarily interest and fees charged to customers on loans outstanding.

The fair value of loans to customers is considered to be not materially different to the amortised cost value at which they are disclosed. 

32.    IMPAIRMENT PROVISIONS ON LOANS TO CUSTOMERS

The following amounts in respect of impairment provisions, net of allowances for recoveries of written off assets, have been deducted from 

the appropriate assets in the balance sheet.

At 1 October 2010 

Charge for the year (note 17) 
On assets sold 

Amounts written off 

Amounts recovered 

At 30 September 2011 

Charge for the year (note 17) 

On assets sold 

Amounts written off 

Amounts recovered 

At 30 September 2012 

First 

Other loans 

mortgages 

and receivables 

Finance 

leases 

£m 

64.9 

5.6 
- 

- 

0.2 

70.7 

12.2 

- 

(6.1) 

(0.4) 

76.4 

£m 

41.2 

17.5 
- 

(11.9) 

(1.6) 

45.2 

11.4 

(11.6) 

(11.4) 

(1.8) 

31.8 

£m 

0.2 

1.3 
- 

(0.6) 

(0.5) 

0.4 

0.5 

- 

- 

(0.3) 

0.6 

Total

£m

106.3

24.4
-

(12.5)

(1.9)

116.3

24.1

(11.6)

(17.5)

(2.5)

108.8

Notes to the accounts   95

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

33.    FAIR VALUE ADJUSTMENTS FROM PORTFOLIO HEDGING

The  Group  applies  fair  value  hedge  accounting  in  respect  of  portfolios  of  loan  assets  where  the  appropriate  criteria  are  met.  In  these 

circumstances the change in the fair value of the hedged items attributable to the hedged risk is shown under this heading.

34.    INVESTMENT IN STRUCTURED ENTITIES

Investments  in  structured  entities  represent  the  Group’s  contribution  made  to  special  purpose  vehicle  (‘SPV’)  companies  established  and 

controlled  by  unrelated  third  parties  to  purchase  pools  of  loan  assets.  All  such  investments  are  denominated  in  sterling,  unlisted  and  are 

considered to be debt investments as defi ned by IFRS. The underlying loans are unsecured loans made to United Kingdom borrowers. The 

Group is under no obligation to make any further contribution to these entities.

The movements in the Group’s investment in structured entities in the year ended 30 September 2012 and the year ended 30 September 

2011 were:

Cost
At 1 October 2011 

Additions    

Effective Interest Rate (‘EIR’) income (note 9) 

Payments received 

At 30 September 2012 

2012 
£m 

11.8 
- 
5.5 
(8.2) 

9.1 

2011

£m

-

11.7

0.7

(0.6)

11.8

The fair values of investments in structured entities are considered to be not materially different to the amortised cost value at which they are 

disclosed.

The  Group  administers  the  assets  of  the  SPV  companies  on  behalf  of  the  owners.  Fee  income  derived  from  this  activity  of  £1.4m                            

(2011: £0.5m) is included within third party servicing fees (Note 11) and £0.1m (2011: £0.1m) is included in other debtors (Note 36) in respect 

of unpaid fees at the year end.

96   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

35.    DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES

All of the Group’s fi nancial derivatives are held for economic hedging purposes, although not all may be designated for hedge accounting in 

accordance with the provisions of IAS 39. The analysis below therefore splits derivatives between those accounted for as hedges and those 

which, while representing an economic hedge, do not qualify for this treatment.

All of the fi nancial derivatives shown are valued using methodologies where the principal inputs are directly or indirectly derived from market 

data and are therefore classifi ed within level two of the fair value hierarchy laid down by IFRS 7. 

The Group’s securitisation borrowings are denominated in sterling, euros and US dollars. All currency borrowings are swapped at inception 

so  that  they  have  the  effect  of  sterling  borrowings.  These  swaps  provide  an  effective  hedge  against  exchange  rate  movements,  but  the 

requirement to carry them at fair value leads, when exchange rates have moved signifi cantly since the issue of the notes, to large balances 

for the swaps being carried in the balance sheet. This is currently the case with both euro and US dollar swaps, although the debit balance is 

compensated for by retranslating the borrowings at the current exchange rate.

Derivative fi nancial assets and liabilities are included within Financial Assets (note 28) and Financial Liabilities (note 47) respectively.

(a)  

  The Group

2012 

Notional 

amount 

£m 

2012 

Assets 

2012 
Liabilities 

£m 

£m 

2011 

Notional 

amount 

£m 

2011 

Assets 

2011

Liabilities 

£m 

£m

Derivatives in accounting 
hedge relationships 
Fair value hedges 

Interest rate swaps 

119.9 

119.9 

Cash fl ow hedges 

Foreign exchange 

basis swaps 

4,850.5 

Interest rate swaps 

- 

4,850.5 

4,970.4 

170.8 

4.4 

175.2 

Other derivatives 
Interest rate swaps 

Interest rate caps 

Total recognised 

derivative assets / 

- 

- 

799.5 

- 

799.5 

799.5 

0.9 

- 

0.9 

(1.5) 

(1.5) 

- 
- 

- 

- 

(3.1) 
- 

(3.1) 

209.6 

209.6 

4.0 

4.0 

4,994.5 

0.6 

1,145.8 

- 

4,995.1 

1,145.8 

5,204.7 

1,149.8 

178.2 

15.8 

194.0 

2.0 

- 

2.0 

(3.8)

(3.8) 

-

-

-

(3.8)

(5.3)

-

(5.3)

(liabilities)     

5,145.6 

800.4 

(4.6) 

5,398.7 

1,151.8 

(9.1)

At 30 September 2012 cash deposits of £100.7m had been pledged as collateral in respect of swaps shown above by the respective swap 

counterparties (2011: £146.0m) as described in note 6.

Notes to the accounts   97

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
   
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

(b)  

  The Company

2012 

Notional 

amount 

£m 

2012 

Assets 

2012 
Liabilities 

£m 

£m 

2011 

Notional 

amount 

£m 

2011 

Assets 

2011 

Liabilities 

£m 

£m

Derivatives in accounting 
hedge relationships 
Fair value hedges 

Interest rate swaps 

Total recognised 

derivative assets 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

110.0 

110.0 

110.0 

4.0 

4.0 

4.0 

-

-

-

Of the interest rate swap agreements used for fair value hedging at 30 September 2011, swaps of a notional value of £110.0m, recognised as 

assets of £4.0m in both the Group and the Company relate to the hedging of the Corporate Bond borrowings. 

All fair value hedging items at 30 September 2012 and all other hedging items at 30 September 2011 relate to the hedging of the Group’s loan 

assets on a portfolio basis.

36.    OTHER RECEIVABLES

(a)  

  The Group

Current assets 
Accrued interest income 

Prepayments   

Other debtors  

2012 
£m 

0.2 
4.4 
2.7 

7.3 

2011 

£m 

0.5 

1.0 

3.2 

4.7 

2010  

£m

0.5

1.0

4.4

5.9

Accrued interest income and other debtors fall within the defi nition of fi nancial assets given in IAS 32.

The fair values of the above items are not considered to be materially different to their carrying values.

98   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
   
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
(b)  

  The Company

Current assets 
Amounts owed by Group companies 

Accrued interest income 

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

2012 
£m 

80.1 
- 

80.1 

2011 

£m 

79.9 

0.1 

80.0 

2011  

£m

125.2

0.6

125.8

Accrued interest income and other debtors fall within the defi nition of fi nancial assets given in IAS 32.

The fair values of the above items are not considered to be materially different to their carrying values.

37.    CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS

Only  ‘Free  Cash’  is  unrestrictedly  available  for  the  Group’s  general  purposes.  Cash  received  in  respect  of  loan  assets  is  not  immediately 

available, due to the terms of the warehouse facilities and the securitisations. ‘Cash and Cash Equivalents’ also includes balances held by the 

Trustees of the Paragon Employee Share Ownership Plans which may only be used to invest in the shares of the Company, pursuant to the 

aims of those plans. 

The total consolidated ‘Cash and Cash Equivalents’ balance may be analysed as shown below:

Free cash    

Securitisation cash 

ESOP cash 

2012 
£m 

127.7 
374.9 
2.2 

504.8 

2011 

£m 

195.0 

374.1 

2.5 

571.6 

2010  

£m

147.8

387.2

1.7

536.7

All ‘Cash and Cash Equivalents’ shown in the Company balance sheet are included in free cash.

Cash and Cash Equivalents includes current bank balances and fi xed rate sterling term deposits with London banks.

Notes to the accounts   99

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

38.    CALLED-UP SHARE CAPITAL

The share capital of the Company consists of a single class of £1 ordinary shares.

Movements in the issued share capital in the year were:

Ordinary shares  
At 1 October 2011 

Shares issued  

At 30 September 2012 

2012 
Number 

2011

Number

299,745,445 
2,096,169 

299,454,078

291,367

301,841,614 

299,745,445

During the year the Company issued 2,090,570 shares at par (2011: 291,367) to the trustees of its ESOP Trusts in order that they could fulfi l 

their obligations under the Group’s share based award arrangements. It also issued 5,599 shares (2011: nil) to satisfy options granted under 

sharesave schemes for a consideration of £5,688 (2011: £nil).

39.    RESERVES

(a)  

  The Group

Share premium account  

Merger reserve  

Cash fl ow hedging reserve  

Profi t and loss account  

(b)  

  The Company

Share premium account  

Merger reserve  

Profi t and loss account  

40.     SHARE PREMIUM ACCOUNT

Balance at 1 October 2011 

Balance at 30 September 2012   

100   Notes to the accounts

Note 

40 

41 

42 

43 

Note 

40 

41 

43 

2012 
£m 

64.1 
(70.2) 
0.7 
555.6 

550.2 

2012 
£m 

64.1 
(23.7) 
333.4 

373.8 

2011 

£m 

64.1 

(70.2) 

1.8 

495.0 

490.7 

2011 

£m 

64.1 

(23.7) 

281.8 

322.2 

2010  

£m

64.1

(70.2)

1.4

450.5

445.8

2010  

£m

64.1

(23.7)

229.0

269.4

  The Group 

The Company

2012 

£m 

64.1 

64.1 

2011 

£m 

64.1 

64.1 

2012 
£m 

64.1 

64.1 

2011

£m

64.1

64.1

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

41.    MERGER RESERVE

Balance at 1 October 2011 

Balance at 30 September 2012   

  The Group 

The Company

2012 

£m 

(70.2) 

(70.2) 

2011 

£m 

(70.2) 

(70.2) 

2012 
£m 

(23.7) 

(23.7) 

2011

£m

(23.7)

(23.7)

The merger reserve arose, due to the provisions of UK company law at the time, on a group restructuring on 12 May 1989 when the Company 

became the parent entity of the Group.

42.    CASH FLOW HEDGING RESERVE

Note 

At 1 October 2011 

Movement in fair value of hedging derivatives 

Deferred tax thereon  

22 

At 30 September 2012 

  The Group 

The Company

2012 

£m 

1.8 
(1.5) 
0.4 

0.7 

2011 

£m 

1.4 

0.4 

- 

1.8 

2012 
£m 

- 
- 
- 

- 

2011

£m

-

-

-

-

The cash fl ows to which these amounts relate are expected to take place, and to affect profi t, over the next 32 years (2011: 33 years). The 

majority of the balance relates to the cross currency basis swaps described in note 6. Cash fl ows in respect of these swaps will continue for 

as long as the related notes remain outstanding.

Foreign exchange gains of £344.9m on asset backed loan notes denominated in US dollars and euros (2011: gains of £3.2m) have been 

taken  to  the  cash  fl ow  hedging  reserve  together  with  equal  and  opposite  movements  on  the  cross  currency  basis  swaps  used  to  hedge                 

these liabilities.

43.    PROFIT AND LOSS ACCOUNT

Note 

44 

45 

13 

22 

50 

At 1 October 2011 

Dividends paid 

Share options exercised 

Charge for share based remuneration 

Tax on share based remuneration 

Actuarial (loss) on retirement benefi t obligation 

Profi t for the year 

At 30 September 2012 

  The Group 

The Company

2012 

£m 

495.0 
(12.3) 
(2.3) 
2.8 
0.9 
(0.7) 
72.2 

555.6 

2011 

£m 

450.5 

(11.1) 

(5.5) 

2.0 

0.1 

(0.6) 

59.6 

495.0 

2012 
£m 

281.8 
(12.3) 
- 
2.8 
- 
- 
61.1 

333.4 

2011

£m

229.0

(11.1)

-

2.0

-

-

61.9

281.8

Notes to the accounts   101

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

44.    EQUITY DIVIDEND

Amounts recognised as distributions to equity shareholders in the period:

Equity dividends on ordinary shares  

Final dividend for the year ended 30 September 2011  

Interim dividend for the year ended 30 September 2012 

Amounts paid and proposed in respect of the year:

Interim dividend for the year ended 

 30 September 2012 

Proposed fi nal dividend for the year ended 

 30 September 2012 

2012 
Per share 

2011 

Per share 

2.65p 
1.50p 

4.15p 

2.40p 

1.35p 

3.75p 

2012 
Per share 

2011 

Per share 

1.50p 

4.50p 

6.00p 

1.35p 

2.65p 

4.00p 

2012 
£m 

7.9 
4.4 

12.3 

2012 
£m 

4.4 

13.4 

17.8 

2011

£m

7.1

4.0

11.1

2011

£m

4.0

7.9

11.9

Dividends  of  £0.0m  (2011:  £0.0m)  were  paid  by  the  Company  in  respect  of  shares  held  by  ESOP  trusts  on  which  dividends  had  not                  

been waived.

The proposed fi nal dividend for the year ended 30 September 2012 will be paid on 11 February 2013, subject to approval at the Annual 

General Meeting, with a record date of 11 January 2013. The dividend will be recognised in the accounts when it is paid.

45.     TRANSACTIONS IN SHARES

Awards from ESOP schemes   
Proceeds    

Cost of shares transferred (note 46)  

(Defi cit) on exercise (note 43) 

Shares issued 
Nominal value (note 38) 

Premium on issue (note 40) 

Proceeds of issue  

(Defi cit) / surplus on transactions in own shares 

  The Group 

The Company

2012 

£m 

2011 

£m 

2012 
£m 

2011

£m

0.2 
(2.5) 

(2.3) 

2.1 
- 

2.1 

(0.2) 

0.8 

(6.3) 

(5.5) 

0.3 

- 

0.3 

(5.2) 

- 
- 

- 

2.1 
- 

2.1 

2.1 

-

-

-

0.3

-

0.3

0.3

102   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

46.    OWN SHARES

Treasury shares 
At 1 October 2011 

Shares purchased 

At 30 September 2012 

ESOP shares  
At 1 October 2011 

Shares purchased 

Shares subscribed for (note 38)   

Options exercised (note 45) 

At 30 September 2012 

Balance at 30 September 2012   

Balance at 1 October 2011 

  The Group 

The Company

2012 

£m 

39.5 
- 

39.5 

8.9 
0.5 
2.1 
(2.5) 

9.0 

48.5 

48.4 

2011 

£m 

39.5 

- 

39.5 

13.7 

1.2 

0.3 

(6.3) 

8.9 

48.4 

53.2 

2012 
£m 

39.5 
- 

39.5 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

39.5 

39.5 

2011

£m

39.5

-

39.5

-

-

-

-

-

39.5

39.5

At 30 September 2012 the number of the Company’s own shares held in treasury was 668,900 (2011: 668,900). These shares had a nominal 

value of £668,900 (2011: £668,900). The dividends on these shares have been waived.

The  ESOP  shares  are  held  in  trust  for  the  benefi t  of  employees  exercising  their  options  under  the  Company’s  share  option  schemes  and 

awards under the Paragon Performance Share Plan, Matching Share Plan and Deferred Bonus Scheme. The trustees’ costs are included in 

the operating expenses of the Group. 

At 30 September 2012, the trusts held 2,397,557 ordinary shares (2011: 2,487,688) with a nominal value of £2,397,557 (2011: £2,487,688) 

and a market value of £5,010,894 (2011: £3,828,552). Options, or other share-based awards, were outstanding against 2,397,557 of these 

shares at 30 September 2012 (2011: 2,487,688). The dividends on 1,988,482 of these shares have been waived (2011: 2,078,613).

47.    FINANCIAL LIABILITIES

(a)  

  The Group

Current liabilities 
Finance lease liability 

Bank loans and overdrafts 

Non-current liabilities 
Asset backed loan notes 

Corporate bond 

Finance lease liability 

Bank loans and overdrafts 

Derivative fi nancial instruments 

Note 

49 

49 

35 

2012 
£m 

1.4 
0.6 

2.0 

7,580.9 
110.0 
10.2 
1,453.3 
4.6 

2011 

£m 

1.2 

0.6 

1.8 

8,049.7 

112.0 

11.6 

1,492.1 

9.1 

2010  

£m

1.1

0.1

1.2

8,336.2

115.8

12.8

1,403.6

17.3

9,159.0 

9,674.5 

9,885.7

A maturity analysis of the above borrowings and further details of asset backed loan notes and bank loans are given in note 48.

Notes to the accounts   103

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

(b)  

  The Company

Current liabilities 
Finance lease liability 

Non-current liabilities 
Corporate bond 

Finance lease liability 

Derivative fi nancial instruments 

Note 

49 

49 

35 

2012 
£m 

2011 

£m 

2010  

£m

1.4 

1.2 

1.1

110.0 
10.2 
- 

120.2 

112.0 

11.6 

- 

123.6 

115.8

12.8

-

128.6

A maturity analysis of the above borrowings is given in note 48.

48.    BORROWINGS

Set out below is the contractual maturity profi le of the Group’s borrowings at 30 September 2012 and 30 September 2011:

In one year 

In more than 

In more than  

Total

Financial liabilities falling due:
In more than 

or less, or 

one year, but 

two years, but 

fi ve years  

on demand 

not more than 

not more than 

two years 

fi ve years 

£m 

£m 

£m 

£m

30 September 2012
Bank overdrafts 

Bank loans  

Corporate bond 

Asset backed loan notes 

30 September 2011
Bank overdrafts 

Bank loans  

Corporate bond 

Asset backed loan notes 

£m 

0.6 

- 

- 

- 

0.6 

0.6 

- 

- 

- 

0.6 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

121.0 

110.0 

- 

231.0 

- 

121.3 

- 

- 

- 

1,332.3 

- 

7,580.9 

0.6

1,453.3

110.0 

7,580.9 

8,913.2 

9,144.8 

- 

1,370.8 

112.0 

8,049.7 

0.6

1,492.1

112.0

8,049.7

9,654.4

121.3 

9,532.5 

The fair values of borrowings are not considered to be signifi cantly different to their carrying values and the effective interest rates are not 

materially different to the rates charged.

104   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

(a)  

  Asset backed loan notes

The asset backed loan notes are secured on portfolios comprising variable and fi xed rate mortgages or personal, retail and car loans, and are 

redeemable in part from time to time, but such redemptions are limited to the net capital received from borrowers in respect of the underlying 

assets. There is no requirement for the Group to make good any shortfall out of general funds. The maturity date of the notes matches the 

maturity date of the underlying assets. It is likely that a substantial proportion of these notes will be repaid within fi ve years.

In each issue there exists an option for the Group to repay all of the notes at an earlier date (the ‘call date’), at the outstanding principal amount.

Interest is payable at a fi xed margin above:

• 

the London Interbank Offered Rate (‘LIBOR’) on notes denominated in sterling;

• 

the Euro Interbank Offered Rate (‘EURIBOR’) on notes denominated in euros; and

• 

the London Interbank Offered Rate (‘US Dollar LIBOR’) on notes denominated in US dollars

All payments in respect of the notes are required to be made in the currency in which they are denominated.

The notes outstanding at 30 September 2012 comprised £7,283.8m (2011: £7,681.7m, 2010: £7,877.8m) in respect of mortgage backed 

notes and £297.1m (2011: £368.0m, 2010: £458.4m) in respect of notes backed by other loan assets. The details of the assets backing these 

securities are given in notes 29 and 30.

The Group publishes detailed information on the performance of all of its note issues on the Bond Investor Reporting section of its website at 

www.paragon-group.co.uk. A more detailed description of the securitisation structure under which these notes are issued is given in note 6. 

In November 2011 a Group company, Paragon Mortgages (No. 16) PLC issued £131.7m Class A Senior notes, rated AAA by Fitch and Aaa 

by Moody’s. The Group retained £32.1m Class Z junior notes and advanced a cash fund of £5.4m.

Notes to the accounts   105

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

Notes in issue at 30 September 2012 and 30 September 2011, net of any held by the Group, were:

Issuer 

Sterling notes 

Maturity 

date 

Call 

date 

Principal 

outstanding 

2012 
£m 

83.6 
226.8 
142.3 
181.3 
89.5 
129.2 
146.5 
131.6 
181.6 
130.1 
74.7 
83.8 
74.2 
74.2 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 7) PLC 

15/05/43 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 8) PLC 

15/04/44 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 9) PLC 

15/05/41 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 10) PLC 

15/06/41 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 11) PLC 

15/10/41 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 12) PLC 

15/11/38 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 13) PLC 

15/01/39 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 14) PLC 

15/09/39 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 15) PLC 

15/12/39 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 16) PLC 

15/04/39 

First Flexible No. 4 PLC 

First Flexible No. 5 PLC 

First Flexible No. 6 PLC 

First Flexible No. 7 PLC 

Paragon Personal and Auto 

01/07/36 

01/06/34 

01/12/35 

15/09/33 

15/05/08 

15/10/08 

15/05/09 

15/12/09 

15/04/10 

15/08/10 

15/10/10 

15/03/11 

15/06/11 

15/10/14 

01/07/08 

01/07/09 

01/03/08 

15/03/11 

Finance (No. 3) PLC 

15/04/36 

15/04/09 

75.0 

Paragon Secured Finance 

(No. 1) PLC 

15/11/35 

15/11/08 

112.5 

US dollar notes 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 7) PLC 
Paragon Mortgages (No. 9) PLC 

15/05/43 
15/05/41 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 10) PLC 

15/06/41 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 11) PLC 

15/10/41 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 12) PLC 

15/11/38 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 13) PLC 

15/01/39 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 14) PLC 

15/09/39 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 15) PLC 

15/12/39 

First Flexible No. 6 PLC 

01/12/35 

Euro notes 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 7) PLC 

15/05/43 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 8) PLC 

15/04/44 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 9) PLC 

15/05/41 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 10) PLC 

15/06/41 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 11) PLC 

15/10/41 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 12) PLC 

15/11/38 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 13) PLC 

15/01/39 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 14) PLC 

15/09/39 

Paragon Mortgages (No. 15) PLC 

15/12/39 

First Flexible No. 6 PLC 

01/12/35 

Paragon Personal and Auto 

15/05/08 
15/05/09 

15/12/09 

15/04/10 

15/08/10 

15/10/10 

15/03/11 

15/06/11 

01/03/08 

15/05/08 

15/10/08 

15/05/09 

15/12/09 

15/04/10 

15/08/10 

15/10/10 

15/03/11 

15/06/11 

01/03/08 

$m 

241.6 
23.2 
176.3 
484.4 
1,089.3 
1,147.6 
1,324.6 
903.3 
11.5 

€m 

245.6 
304.3 
220.9 
265.5 
227.9 
379.4 
360.4 
395.8 
282.4 
42.1 

2011 

£m 

86.1 

242.8 

146.4 

183.4 

92.1 

131.5 

148.5 

161.6 

186.5 

- 

80.1 

92.1 

78.7 

95.2 

92.7 

138.0 

$m 

248.9 

23.8 

192.7 

501.6 

1,118.4 

1,176.6 

1,363.0 

930.3 

11.9 

€m 

253.1 

317.5 

227.2 

266.7 

281.8 

383.3 

365.3 

400.8 

285.0 

43.9 

Average interest

margin

2012 
% 

2011

%

0.42 
0.59 
0.38 
0.56 
0.28 
0.38 
0.35 
0.29 
0.29 
2.75 
1.10 
0.99 
1.27 
0.25 

0.95 

0.98 

% 

0.74 
0.36 
0.09 
0.10 
0.24 
0.23 
0.20 
0.19 
0.56 

% 

0.66 
0.48 
0.56 
0.41 
0.52 
0.51 
0.39 
0.43 
0.67 
1.05 

0.84 

0.42

0.61

0.38

0.56

0.28

0.37

0.17

0.16

0.14

-

1.10

0.99

1.28

0.13

0.95

1.00

%

0.74

0.36

0.09

0.10

0.14

0.11

0.10

0.09

0.56

%

0.66

0.48

0.56

0.41

0.52

0.51

0.20

0.21

0.33

1.05

0.84

Finance (No. 3) PLC 

15/04/36 

15/04/09 

129.3 

159.8 

Following the year end, on 25 October 2012 a Group company, Paragon Mortgages (No. 17) PLC, issued £195.5m of sterling mortgage 

backed fl oating rate notes at par. £175.0m of the notes were rated AAA, £10.5m rated AA and £10.0m rated A. The average interest margin 

above LIBOR on the notes was 145.9% and the proceeds were used to pay down existing warehouse debt. The Group retained £4.5m of 

subordinated notes and also invested £6.0m in the fi rst loss fund, bringing its total investment to £10.5m, or 5.25% of the issue amount.

106   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

(b)  

  Bank borrowings

Assets are typically securitised within 12 months of origination. Before securitisation new loans are fi nanced by a bank loan, referred to as a 

‘warehouse facility’ These are generally drawn down to fund completions and repaid when assets are securitised. More information on this 

process is given in note 6 and details of assets held within the warehouse facilities are given in note 29. Details of the Group’s bank borrowings 

are given below.

Paragon Second 

Principal 

value 

£m 

2012 
Maximum 

available 

facility 

£m 

Carrying 
value 

Principal 

value 

£m 

£m 

2011

Maximum 

available 

facility 

£m 

Carrying

value

£m

Funding 

1,332.3 

1,332.3 

1,332.3 

1,370.8 

1,370.8 

1,370.8

Paragon Fourth 

Funding 

Paragon Fifth 

Funding 

121.0 

- 

200.0 

200.0 

121.0 

123.0 

200.0 

121.3

- 

- 

- 

-

1,453.3 

1,732.3 

1,453.3 

1,493.8 

1,570.8 

1,492.1

The Paragon Second Funding warehouse was available for further drawings until 29 February 2008 at which point it converted automatically to 

a term loan and no further drawings were allowed. This loan is a committed sterling facility provided to Paragon Second Funding Limited by a 

consortium of banks and is secured on all the assets of Paragon Second Funding Limited, Paragon Car Finance (No. 1) Limited and Paragon 

Personal Finance (No. 1) Limited. Its fi nal repayment date is 28 February 2050 but it is likely that substantial repayments will be made within 

the next fi ve years. Interest on this loan is payable monthly in sterling at 0.675% above LIBOR (2011: 0.675% above LIBOR). Repayments of 

this facility before the fi nal repayment date are restricted to the amount of principal cash realised from the funded assets.

On 27 September 2010 the Group entered into a £200.0m committed sterling facility provided to Paragon Fourth Funding Limited by Macquarie 

Bank plc to provide funding for new lending. This facility is secured on all the assets of Paragon Fourth Funding Limited and is available for 

drawing for a period of two years and has a term of four years. Loans originated in this warehouse are refi nanced in the mortgage backed 

securitisation market from time to time when appropriate. Interest on this loan is payable monthly in sterling at 2.875% above LIBOR. The 

facility was renewed on substantially the same terms with an increased commitment of £250.0m, for a further two year period on 2 November 

2012  and  has  a  renewal  process  that  allows  the  Group  to  agree  a  new  two  year  commitment  period  prior  to  the  expiry  of  the  existing 

commitment period. Repayments on this facility are limited to principal cash received from the funded assets.

To provide further funding for new lending, on 27 September 2012, the Group entered into a £200.0m committed sterling facility provided 

to Paragon Fifth Funding Limited by the wholesale division of Lloyds Bank. This facility is secured on all the assets of Paragon Fifth Funding 

Limited and is structured with a three year term to permit drawings and re-drawings in its fi rst eighteen months, or up to 24 months, subject 

to a capital markets refi nancing of the facility in its fi rst twelve months. Loans originated in this warehouse will be refi nanced in the mortgage 

backed securitisation market from time to time when appropriate. Interest on this loan is payable monthly in sterling at 2.75% above three 

month LIBOR. The facility has a renewal process that allows the Group to agree a new commitment period prior to the expiry of the existing 

commitment period. As with the other warehouses, repayments on this facility are limited to principal cash received from the funded assets.

The Group additionally has entered into £63.6m (2011: £64.1m) of sterling revolving credit facilities to fund, where necessary, the purchase 

of mortgage redraws in certain subsidiary companies. At 30 September 2012 £nil (2011: £nil) had been drawn down under these facilities.

The weighted average margin above LIBOR on bank borrowings at 30 September 2012 was 0.858% (2011: 0.856%). 

(c)  Corporate bond

On 20 April 2005 the Company issued £120.0m of 7% Callable Subordinated Notes at an issue price of 99.347% to provide long term capital 

for the Group. These bonds bore interest at a fi xed rate of 7% per annum until 20 April 2012, after which interest was payable at a fi xed rate of 

3.729% per annum. The bonds are repayable on 20 April 2017. They are unsecured and subordinated to any other creditors of the Company. 

At 30 September 2012 £110.0m (2011: £112.0m, 2010: £115.8m) was included within the fi nancial liabilities of the Company and the Group 

in respect of these bonds.

Notes to the accounts   107

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
   
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

49.    OBLIGATIONS UNDER FINANCE LEASES

The fi nance lease obligations recorded in the accounts arise from a sale and leaseback transaction of one of the Group’s offi ce buildings in 

1997 which falls to be treated as a fi nance lease under IAS 17 - ‘Leases’. The lease expires in 2019 and is subject to fi ve yearly rent reviews, 

with guaranteed minimum rent increases.

The minimum lease payments payable under this lease are:

Amounts payable  
Within one year 

Within two to fi ve years 

After fi ve years 

Less: future fi nance charges 

Present value of lease obligations 

The present value of these payments recognised in the fi nancial statements is:

Amounts payable  
Within one year 

Within two to fi ve years 

After fi ve years 

2012 
£m 

2.3 
9.6 
3.0 

14.9 
(3.3) 

11.6 

2012 
£m 

1.4 
7.4 
2.8 

11.6 

2011 

£m 

2.2 

9.5 

5.4 

17.1 

(4.3) 

12.8 

2011 

£m 

1.2 

6.7 

4.9 

12.8 

2010  

£m

2.2

9.3

7.8

19.3

(5.4)

13.9

2010  

£m

1.1

6.0

6.8

13.9

The fair value of the lease obligation is not considered to be materially different to the present value of the future obligations shown above. The 

interest rate implicit in the lease is 7.99% (2011: 7.99%).

At 30 September 2012 the minimum amount of payments expected to be received in respect of non-cancellable sub-leases in respect of this 

building was £nil (2011: £400,000).

108   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

50.    RETIREMENT BENEFIT OBLIGATIONS

The Group operates a funded defi ned benefi t pension scheme in the UK (the ‘Plan’). A full actuarial valuation was carried out at 31 March 2010 

and updated to 30 September 2012 by a qualifi ed independent actuary.

The liabilities of the Plan are measured by discounting the best estimate of future cash fl ows to be paid out by the scheme using the Projected 

Unit method. This amount is refl ected in the liability in the balance sheet. The Projected Unit method is an accrued benefi ts valuation method 

in which the technical provisions are calculated based on service up until the valuation date allowing for future salary growth until the date of 

retirement, withdrawal or death, as appropriate. The future service rate is then calculated as the contribution rate required to fund the service 

accruing over the control period again allowing for future salary growth. As a result of the Plan being closed to new entrants, the service cost 

as a percentage of pensionable salaries is expected to increase as the members of the Plan approach retirement. However, the membership 

is expected to reduce so that the service charge in monetary terms will gradually reduce. The major weighted average assumptions used by 

the actuary were (in nominal terms):

30 September 
2012 

30 September 

30 September  

2011 

2010

In determining net pension cost for the year 

Discount rate 

Expected long term rate of return on scheme assets 

Rate of compensation increase   

Rate of increase of pensions  

 in payment (accrued before 6 April 2006) 

 in payment (accrued after 5 April 2006) 

 in deferment 

In determining benefi t obligations 

Discount rate 

Rate of compensation increase   

Rate of increase of pensions  

 in payment (accrued before 6 April 2006) 

 in payment (accrued after 5 April 2006) 

 in deferment 

Further life expectancy at age 60 

 Pensioner (male) 

 Pensioner (female) 

 Non-retired member (male)   
 Non-retired member (female) 

5.25% 
5.90% 
4.10% 

3.10% 
3.10% 
3.00% 

4.60% 
3.65% 

2.65% 
2.65% 
2.55% 

30 
32 
32 
34 

5.20% 

6.30% 

4.00% 

3.00% 

3.00% 

3.00% 

5.25% 

4.10% 

3.10% 

3.10% 

3.00% 

30 

32 

32 
34 

5.70%

6.60%

4.20%

3.20%

2.50%

3.20%

5.20%

4.00%

3.00%

2.50%

3.00%

30

33

31
35

Notes to the accounts   109

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

The assets in the Plan at 30 September 2012, 30 September 2011 and 30 September 2010 and the expected rates of return were:

At 30 September 2012 
Value 

Long 

term rate 

of return 

expected 

6.05% 

3.60% 

4.60% 

£m 

40.7 
22.5 
6.1 

At 30 September 2011 

At 30 September 2010

Long 

term rate 

of return 

expected 

6.75% 

4.65% 

5.30% 

Value 

£m 

34.0 

19.3 

5.8 

Long 

term rate 

of return 

expected 

7.25% 

4.40% 

5.80% 

Value

£m

35.2

16.8

5.2

5.10% 

69.3 

5.90% 

59.1 

6.28% 

57.2

(83.2) 

(13.9) 

(73.5) 

(14.4) 

(73.7)

(16.5)

Equities  

Bonds   

Other 

Total market 
value of assets 
Present value of 

scheme liabilities 

(Defi cit) in the scheme 

The Plan assets are held in a separate trustee-administered fund to meet long-term pension liabilities to past and present employees. The 

trustees of the Plan are required to act in the best interests of the Plan’s benefi ciaries. The appointment of trustees to the Plan is determined 

by the scheme’s trust documentation. The Group has a policy that one third of all trustees should be nominated by active and pensioner 

members of the Plan.

At 30 September 2012 the Plan assets were invested in a diversifi ed portfolio that consisted primarily of equity and gilt investments. The 

majority of the equities held by the Plan are in developed markets. The target asset allocations for the year ending 30 September 2013 are 

50% equities, 30% bonds and 20% other assets.

In conjunction with the trustees, the Group has continued to conduct asset-liability reviews of the Plan. These studies are used to assist the 

trustees and the Group to determine the optimal long-term asset allocation with regard to the structure of liabilities within the Plan. The results 

of  the  studies  are  used  to  assist  the  trustees  in  managing  the  volatility  in  the  underlying  investment  performance  and  risk  of  a  signifi cant 

increase in the scheme defi cit by providing information used to determine the investment strategy of the Plan.

Following the 2010 actuarial valuation, the trustees put in place a recovery plan. The trustees’ recovery plan aims to meet the statutory funding 

objective within seven years and three months from the date of valuation, i.e. by 30 June 2017.

The rate of return expected on scheme assets is based on the current level of expected returns on risk free investments (primarily government 
bonds), the historical level of the risk premium associated with other asset classes in which the portfolio is invested and the expectations for 

future returns of each asset class. The expected return for each asset class was then weighted based on the asset allocation to develop the 

expected long-term rate of return on assets assumption for the portfolio.

The movement in the market value of the scheme assets during the year was as follows:

At 1 October 2011 

Movement in year 

 Contributions by the Group   

 Contributions by scheme members 

 Benefi ts paid 

 Expected return on scheme assets 
 Actuarial gain / (loss) 

At 30 September 2012 

The actual return on scheme assets in the year ended 30 September 2012 was £8.0m (2011: £(0.8)m).

2012 
£m 

59.1 

2.9 
0.3 
(0.9) 
3.5 
4.4 

69.3 

2011

£m

57.2

3.5

0.3

(1.1)

3.6
(4.4)

59.1

110   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
   
 
 
   
 
   
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The movement in the present value of the scheme liabilities during the year was as follows:

At 1 October 2011 

Movement in year 

 Current service cost 

 Past service costs 

 Contributions by scheme members 

 Plan curtailments 

 Benefi ts paid 

 Finance cost 

 Actuarial loss / (gain) 

At 30 September 2012 

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

2012 
£m 

73.5 

1.5 
- 
0.3 
- 
(0.9) 
3.9 
4.9 

83.2 

2011

£m

73.7

1.6

-

0.3

(0.7)

(1.1)

3.8

(4.1)

73.5

The most recent valuation of the scheme liabilities on a buy-out basis obtained by the trustees in accordance with section 224 of the Pensions 

Act 2004 was calculated at 31 March 2010, when the valuation on that basis was £85.6m. 

The sensitivity of the valuation of the scheme liabilities to the principal assumptions disclosed above at 30 September 2012 is as follows:

Assumption 

Discount rate   

Rate of infl ation * 

Rate of salary growth 

Rates of mortality 

Increase in assumption 

Impact on scheme liabilities

0.1% p.a. 

0.1% p.a. 

0.1% p.a. 

1 year of life expectancy 

Decrease by 2.5%

Increase by 2.5%

Increase by 0.5%

Increase by 1.9%

*  maintaining a 1% real increase in salary growth

The duration of the scheme’s liabilities are shown in the table below:

Category of member 
Active members 

Deferred pensioners 

Current pensioners 

All members 

2012 
Years 

27 
28 
14 

27 

2011

Years

28

29

15

28

The agreed rate of employer contributions was 27.4% of gross salaries for participating employees up to and including 26 June 2011. With 

effect from 27 June 2011, the employer contribution rate decreased to 26.6% of gross salaries, following the fi nalisation of the 31 March 2010 

actuarial valuation. 

Since 1 July 2008 an additional contribution of £0.5m per annum has been paid by monthly instalments. During the year ended 30 September 

2011 this was increased to £1.5m per annum, backdated to 1 April 2010.

The present best estimate of the contributions to be made to the plan by the Group in the year ending 30 September 2013 is £2.9m.

Notes to the accounts   111

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

The amounts charged in the income statement in respect of the pension scheme are:

Current service cost 

Past service cost 

Plan curtailments 

Included within operating expenses   

Expected return on scheme assets   

Funding cost of scheme liability    

Total expense recognised in profi t 

Note 

13 

9 

10 

2012 
£m 

1.5 
- 
- 

1.5 
(3.5) 
3.9 

1.9 

The actuarial losses and gains in the statement of comprehensive income in respect of the pension scheme are:

Gain / (loss) on scheme assets 

(Loss) / gain on scheme liabilities  

Total actuarial (loss) 

Tax thereon  

Net actuarial (loss)  

Note 

22 

43 

2012 
£m 

4.4 
(4.9) 

(0.5) 
(0.2) 

(0.7) 

2011

£m

1.6

-

(0.7)

0.9

(3.6)

3.8

1.1

2011

£m

(4.4)

4.1

(0.3)

(0.3)

(0.6)

The tax shown above is disproportionate to the actuarial losses recorded in the periods due to the effect on deferred tax of the changes in tax 

rate described in note 19. 

The cumulative value of actuarial losses charged through reserves to the profi t and loss account since 1 October 2001, the fi rst date on which 

a valuation of the scheme assets and liabilities on a basis consistent with IAS 19 was carried out is £34.2m (2011: £33.7m).

The fi ve year history of experience adjustments on the scheme is as shown below:

Fair value of scheme assets 

Present value of scheme obligations  

(Defi cit) in the scheme 

Experience adjustments on 

scheme assets: 

Amount (£m) 

Percentage of scheme assets 

Experience adjustments on 

scheme liabilities: 

Amount (£m) 

Percentage of scheme liabilities  

2012 
£m 

69.3 
(83.2) 

(13.9) 

4.4 
6.4% 

(0.1) 
0.0% 

2011 
£m 

59.1 

(73.5) 

(14.4) 

(4.4) 

(7.5)% 

2.8 

3.8% 

2010 
£m 

57.2 

(73.7) 

(16.5) 

0.4 

0.6% 

- 

0.0% 

2009 
£m 

52.0 

(63.5) 

(11.5) 

2.8 

5.3% 

- 

0.0% 

2008 
£m

43.9

(48.9)

(5.0)

(10.4)

(23.8)%

0.2

0.4%

In addition to the Group Pension Scheme, the Group operates a defi ned contribution (Stakeholder) pension scheme. Contributions made by 

the Group to this scheme in the year ended 30 September 2012 were £0.2m (2011: £0.2m).

112   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

51.    DEFERRED TAX

(a)  

  The Group

The movements in the net deferred tax liability / (asset) are as follows:

Net liability / (asset) at 1 October 2011 

Income statement  charge  

(Credit) / charge to equity  

Net liability / (asset) at 30 September 2012 

Note 

19 

22 

2012 
£m 

5.0 
3.7 
(1.1) 

7.6 

The net deferred tax liability / (asset) for which provision has been made is analysed as follows:

Accelerated tax depreciation 

Retirement benefi t obligations 

Impairment and other provisions  

Tax losses   

Other timing differences 

Net deferred tax liability / (asset)   

(b)  

  The Company

2012 
£m 

(0.8) 
(3.2) 
16.5 
(3.3) 
(1.6) 

7.6 

2011 

£m 

(1.5) 

6.3 

0.2 

5.0 

2011 

£m 

(1.0) 

(3.6) 

16.2 

(6.6) 

- 

5.0 

No provision for deferred tax was required in the Company at 30 September 2012, 30 September 2011 or 30 September 2010.

52.    CURRENT TAX LIABILITIES

(a)  

  The Group

UK Corporation Tax 

(b)  

  The Company

UK Corporation Tax 

2012 
£m 

13.3 

13.3 

2012 
£m 

4.4 

4.4 

2011 

£m 

10.7 

10.7 

2011 

£m 

3.3 

3.3 

2010  

£m

(2.8)

2.9

(1.6)

(1.5)

2010  

£m

(1.4)

(4.5)

16.5

(13.2)

1.1

(1.5)

2010  

£m

16.2

16.2

2010  

£m

1.5

1.5

Notes to the accounts   113

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

53.    OTHER LIABILITIES

(a)  

  The Group

Current liabilities 
Accrued interest 

Deferred income 

Other accruals  

Other taxation and social security 

Non-current liabilities 
Deferred income 

Other accruals  

2012 
£m 

23.4 
0.3 
11.8 
1.2 

36.7 

1.1 
- 

1.1 

2011 

£m 

25.4 

0.3 

11.7 

0.9 

38.3 

1.4 

0.1 

1.5 

2010  

£m

21.1

0.4

10.1

0.8

32.4

1.5

0.1

1.6

Accrued interest and other accruals fall within the defi nition of ‘other fi nancial liabilities’ set out in IAS 32 and IAS 39 and their fair values are 

not considered to be materially different to their carrying values.

(b)  

  The Company

Current liabilities 
Amounts owed to Group companies 

Accrued interest 

Deferred income 

Non-current liabilities 
Deferred income 

2012 
£m 

69.2 
1.8 
0.1 

71.1 

0.7 

0.7 

2011 

£m 

312.9 

3.5 

0.1 

316.5 

0.8 

0.8 

2010  

£m

385.6

3.5

0.1

389.2

0.9

0.9

Accrued interest and other accruals fall within the defi nition of ‘other fi nancial liabilities’ set out in IAS 32 and IAS 39 and their fair values are 

not considered to be materially different to their carrying values.

114   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

54.    NET CASH FLOW FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES

(a)  

  The Group

Profi t before tax 

Non-cash items included in profi t and other adjustments: 

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment 

Amortisation of intangible assets 

Foreign exchange movement on borrowings 

Other non-cash movements on borrowings 

Impairment losses on loans to customers 

Charge for share based remuneration 

(Profi t) / loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment 

Net decrease / (increase) in operating assets:  

Loans to customers 

Derivative fi nancial instruments   

Fair value of portfolio hedges  

Other receivables 

Net (decrease) / increase in operating liabilities: 

Derivative fi nancial instruments   

Other liabilities 

Cash generated by operations 

Income taxes (paid) / received 

(b)  

  The Company

Profi t before tax 

Non-cash items included in profi t and other adjustments: 

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment 

Non-cash movements on borrowings 

Impairment losses on investments in subsidiaries  

Charge for share based remuneration 

Net (increase) / decrease in operating assets:  

Other receivables 

Derivative fi nancial instruments   

Net increase / (decrease) in operating liabilities: 

Derivative fi nancial instruments   

Other liabilities 

Cash (utilised) / generated by operations 

Income taxes (paid) 

2012 
£m 

95.5 

2.1 
1.0 
(344.9) 
(0.7) 
24.1 
2.8 
- 

8.2 
351.4 
2.3 
- 

(4.5) 
(3.0) 

134.3 
(17.0) 

117.3 

2012 
£m 

65.4 

1.0 
(2.0) 
116.7 
2.8 

(0.1) 
4.0 

- 
(245.5) 

(57.7) 
(3.2) 

(60.9) 

2011  

£m

80.8

2.0

0.9

(3.2)

(1.2)

24.4

2.0

(0.1)

150.8

8.5

5.2

1.2

(8.2)

3.4

266.5

(20.4)

246.1

2011  
£m

65.1

1.1

(3.8)

1.5

2.0

45.8

4.0

-

(72.8)

42.9

(1.4)

41.5

Notes to the accounts   115

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

55.    NET CASH FLOW FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES

Proceeds on disposal of property, plant and equipment 

Purchases of property, plant and equipment 

Purchases of intangible assets 

Investment in subsidiary undertakings 

Net cash (utilised) / generated by investing activities 

  The Group 

The Company

2012 

£m 

0.2 
(1.6) 
(0.8) 
- 

(2.2) 

2011 

£m 

0.9 

(2.0) 

(1.0) 

- 

(2.1) 

2012 
£m 

- 
- 
- 
7.6 

7.6 

56.    NET CASH FLOW FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES

Shares issued  

Dividends paid (note 44) 

Issue of asset backed fl oating rate notes 

Repayment of asset backed fl oating rate notes 

Capital element of fi nance lease payments 

Movement on bank facilities 

Purchase of shares (note 46) 

Sale of shares (note 45) 

Net cash (utilised) by fi nancing activities 

  The Group 

The Company

2012 

£m 

- 
(12.3) 
129.9 
(254.9) 
(1.2) 
(43.1) 
(0.5) 
0.2 

(181.9) 

2011 

£m 

- 

(11.1) 

- 

(284.1) 

(1.1) 

87.1 

(1.2) 

0.8 

(209.6) 

2012 
£m 

2.1 
(12.3) 
- 
- 
(1.2) 
- 
- 
- 

(11.4) 

2011

£m

-

-

-

16.0

16.0

2011

£m

0.3

(11.1)

-

-

(1.1)

-

-

-

(11.9)

57.    OPERATING LEASE ARRANGEMENTS

(a)  

  As lessee

Minimum lease payments under operating 

leases recognised in income for the year 

Offi ce buildings 

  Motor vehicles 

  The Group 

The Company

2012 

£m 

2.3 
0.3 

2.6 

2011 

£m 

2.3 

0.2 

2.5 

2012 
£m 

2011

£m

- 
- 

- 

-

-

-

116   Notes to the accounts

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

At 30 September 2012 the Group had outstanding commitments for future minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating leases, 

which fall due as follows:

Amounts falling due: 
Within one year 

Between two and fi ve years 

After more than fi ve years 

  The Group 

The Company

2012 

£m 

2.5 
5.6 
0.8 

8.9 

2011 

£m 

2.6 

7.3 

2.0 

11.9 

2012 
£m 

2011

£m

- 
- 
- 

- 

-

-

-

-

Operating lease payments represent rents payable by the Group in respect of certain of its offi ce premises and lease payments on company 

vehicles. The average term of the current building leases is 11 years (2011: 11 years) with rents subject to review every fi ve years, while the 

average term of the vehicle leases is 3 years (2011: 3 years).

(b)  

  As lessor

Certain of the Group’s offi ce premises which are not currently required by the Group have been sub-let. Rental income from these premises 

during the year ended 30 September 2012 was:

Rental income  

  The Group 

The Company

2012 

£m 

0.3 

2011 

£m 

1.2 

2012 
£m 

0.3 

2011

£m

1.2

At  30  September  2012  the  Group  had  received  outstanding  commitments  from  tenants  for  future  minimum  lease  payments  under 

non-cancellable operating leases, which fall due as follows:

Amounts receivable: 
Within one year 

  The Group 

The Company

2012 

£m 

- 

- 

2011 
£m 

0.4 

0.4 

2012 
£m 

- 

- 

2011
£m

0.4

0.4

58.    CAPITAL COMMITMENTS

At 30 September 2012 the Group had no commitments in respect of capital expenditure contracted but not provided for (2011: £0.9m).

Notes to the accounts   117

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

59.    RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

(a)  

  The Group

On 27 May 2010, Mr A K Fletcher, an independent non-executive director of the Company, was appointed as a trustee of the Group Pension 

Plan. In respect of this appointment he was paid £10,000 in the year ended 30 September 2012 by Paragon Finance plc, the sponsoring 

company of the Plan (2011: £10,000).

The Group Pension Plan is a related party of the Group. Transactions with the plan are described in note 50.

The Group had no other transactions with related parties other than the key management compensation disclosed in note 14.

(b)  

The Company

During  the  year  the  parent  company  entered  into  transactions  with  its  subsidiaries,  which  are  related  parties.  Management  services                  

were provided to the Company by one of its subsidiaries and the Company granted awards under the share based payment arrangements 

described  in  note  15  to  employees  of  subsidiary  undertakings.  The  Company  also  issued  shares  to  the  trustees  of  its  ESOP  trusts,  as 

described in note 38.

Details of the Company’s investments in subsidiaries and the income derived from them are shown in notes 26 and 27.

Outstanding current account balances with subsidiaries are shown in notes 36 and 53.

During the year the Company incurred interest costs of £9.7m in respect of borrowings from its subsidiaries (2011: £15.4m).

118   Notes to the accounts

Appendices to the annual report
For the year ended 30 September 2012

A.  COST : INCOME RATIO

Cost:income ratio is derived as follows:

Cost - operating expenses 

Total operating income 

Cost / Income  

B.  UNDERLYING PROFIT

 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

2012 
£m 

51.9 
170.2 

2011

£m

45.4

150.9

30.5% 

30.1%

Underlying profi t is determined by excluding from the operating result certain costs of a one off nature, which do not refl ect the underlying 

business performance of the Group, and fair value accounting adjustments arising from the Group’s hedging arrangements.

First Mortgages 
Profi t before tax for the period (note 7) 

Less:  Fair value losses / (gains) 

Consumer Finance 
Profi t before tax for the period (note 7) 

Less:  Fair value losses / (gains) 

Total 
Profi t before tax for the period (note 7) 

Less:  Fair value losses / (gains) 

2012 
£m 

63.2 
(1.6) 

61.6 

32.3 
0.3 

32.6 

95.5 
(1.3) 

94.2 

2011

£m

67.1

0.2

67.3

13.7

0.1

13.8

80.8

0.3

81.1

Appendices to the Annual Report   119

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

C.  NET ASSET VALUE PER SHARE

Net asset value per share is derived as follows:

Total equity (£m) 

Outstanding issued shares (m) 

Treasury shares (m) 

Shares held by ESOP schemes (m)   

Note 

38 

46 

46 

2012 

803.5 

301.8 
(0.7) 
(2.3) 

298.8 

2011

742.0

299.7

(0.7)

(2.5)

296.5

Net asset value per £1 ordinary share 

269p 

250p

120   Appendices to the Annual Report 

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
By Carbon Balancing the material used to produce this publication we have:

•  Saved 1,843 Kilograms of CO2.

•  Preserved 154.81 Square metres of Land.

The estimated carbon impact of this publication comes from a calculator developed by 

the Edinburgh Centre of Carbon Management (ECCM). It is derived from data supplied 

by the paper mill or, where this is not available, generic industry factors as determined 

by ECCM.

The  estimated  carbon  impacts  are  measured  with  the  point  of  delivery  being  the       

printer’s doorstep.

What is Carbon Balanced Paper?

Carbon  Balanced,  put  simply,  is  where  the  carbon  impact  of  a  product  or 

service  has  been  estimated  and  an  equivalent  amount  of  carbon  dioxide  is 

either  prevented 

from  being  released  or 

is  absorbed 

from 

the  atmosphere.

Carbon  Balancing 

is 

facilitated  by 

the  World  Land  Trust,  an  ecological 

charity  which 

ensures 

a 

company’s 

peace 

of  mind 

regarding 

the 

credibility  and 

integrity  of  how  carbon 

impacts  are  balanced 

(offset).

Carbon Balancing is achieved through land purchase of ecologically important standing 

forests, under imminent threat of clearance, where carbon is locked that would otherwise 

be released. These protected forests are then able to continue absorbing carbon from 

the atmosphere.

CBP00017942011123313

The Paragon Group of Companies PLC

51 Homer Road     Solihull     West Midlands     B91 3QJ
Telephone: 0121 712 2323     www.paragon-group.co.uk     Registered No. 2336032

)
2
1
0
2
/
1
1
(
4
9
3
6
P
R
G